5. 婆罗门品义注巴利 5. Brāhmaṇavaggo
255 段
1. 《布拉玛优经》的注释巴利
1. Brahmāyusuttavaṇṇanā
383 “如是我闻”这句,是《布拉玛优经》的经文。其中“与大比丘僧团俱”的“大”,既指功德上的大,也指数目上的大。因为这位比丘僧团具足少欲等功德,所以在功德上确实是大;在数目上也是大,有五百位比丘。“比丘僧团”就是比丘的团体,也就是依共同的见解和戒律而和合聚集的沙门众。“俱”就是在一起。“与五百位比丘”中的“五百”,是指这些比丘有五百之数。“量”是指标准、数量。所以,就像说“于食知量”时,意思是对于食物知道适量、知道限度;这里也应同样理解:那五百位比丘的“五百”,就是五百这个数量。比丘的百数,就是比丘百众。与那五百位比丘一起。巴利
383.Evaṃme sutanti brahmāyusuttaṃ. Tattha mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti mahatāti guṇamahattenapi mahatā, saṅkhyāmahattenapi. So hi bhikkhusaṅghe guṇehipi mahā ahosi appicchatādiguṇasamannāgatattā, saṅkhyāyapi mahā pañcasatasaṅkhyattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅghena bhikkhusaṅghena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghātasaṅkhātena samaṇagaṇenāti attho. Saddhinti ekato. Pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehīti pañca mattā etesanti pañcamattāni. Mattāti pamāṇaṃ vuccati, tasmā yathā bhojane mattaññūti vutte bhojane mattaṃ jānāti pamāṇaṃ jānātīti attho hoti, evamidhāpi tesaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañcamattā pañcapamāṇanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhūnaṃ satāni bhikkhusatāni. Tehi pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi.
一百二十岁,就是一百二十岁。三类吠陀,指梨俱吠陀、夜柔吠陀和娑摩吠陀。因为凭口诵而达到彼岸,所以叫“到彼岸者”。与尼犍度和克咤跋一起,就是“具尼犍度克咤跋者”。尼犍度是阐明树木等事物名称和异名的典籍;克咤跋是为诗人提供帮助的、关于仪轨法则的典籍。与文字分一起,就是“具文字分者”。文字分就是语音学和训诂学。“以古传为第五者”:把阿闼婆吠陀算作第四,再把与“此曾有,此曾有”这类说法相关联的古代故事称为“古传”,作为第五,所以叫“以古传为第五者”,即属于这些以古传为第五者。通达章句及其余文法,并能广为解说,所以叫“章句文法家”。所谓“顺世论”,是指诡辩诤论之学的典籍。“大士相”是指阐明大士——佛等——之相的典籍,共一万二千偈,其中有一万六千偈名为“佛咒”,依此可以知道这样的差别:“具足此相者名为佛,具足此相者名为独觉佛,具足此相者名为两位上首弟子、八十位大弟子、佛母、佛父、首席男侍者、首席女侍者、转轮王。”“无缺”是指在这些顺世论和大士相方面,不缺减、圆满具足,也就是说没有缺失。所谓“有缺失”,就是不能从义理和文句两方面都完全掌握这些。至于“听闻”等语中应当说明的内容,已在《萨雷亚咖经》中说过。巴利
Vīsavassasatikoti vīsādhikavassasatiko. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti iruvedayajuvedasāmavedānaṃ. Oṭṭhapahatakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gatoti pāragū. Saha nighaṇḍunā ca keṭubhena ca sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṃ, nighaṇḍūti nāmanighaṇṭurukkhādīnaṃ vevacanappakāsakaṃ satthaṃ. Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo kavīnaṃ upakārāya satthaṃ. Saha akkharappabhedena sakkharappabhedānaṃ. Akkharappabhedoti sikkhā ca nirutti ca. Itihāsapañcamānanti āthabbaṇavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā ‘‘itiha āsa itiha āsā’’ti īdisavacanappaṭisaṃyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā, tesaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ. Padañca tadavasesañca byākaraṇaṃ adhīyati pavedeti cāti padako veyyākaraṇo. Lokāyataṃ vuccati vitaṇḍavādasatthaṃ. Mahāpurisalakkhaṇanti mahāpurisānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ lakkhaṇadīpakaṃ dvādasasahassaganthappamāṇaṃ satthaṃ, yattha soḷasasahassagāthāparimāṇāya buddhamantā nāma ahesuṃ, yesaṃ vasena ‘‘iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgatā buddhā nāma honti, iminā paccekabuddhā nāma honti, iminā dve aggasāvakā, asītimahāsāvakā, buddhamātā, buddhapitā, aggupaṭṭhāko, aggupaṭṭhāyikā, rājā cakkavattī’’ti ayaṃ viseso ñāyati. Anavayoti imesu lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anūno paripūrakārī, avayo na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avayo nāma yo tāni atthato ca ganthato ca sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti. Assosi khotiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sāleyyakasutte (ma. ni. 1.439 ādayo) vuttameva.
384 这位婆罗门因为年纪太大,没办法亲自走过去,就把那个年轻学生叫过来,这样对他说。另外,这位婆罗门心里想:“在这个世上,很多人打着‘我是佛、我是佛’的名号到处走动,所以我不该只凭传闻就去拜访他。有些人去拜访之后,连想转身离开都很难,还会惹上麻烦。不如我派我的学生先去,弄清楚‘他到底是不是佛’,然后再决定要不要去拜访。”于是他叫来那个年轻学生,说了“我儿,这位……”等等的话。“那位尊者”,就是指那位尊贵的人。“确实如此”,就是“事实就是这样”的意思。这里的宾格用法,是用来表达“实际状态”这个意思。“那么,尊者,我该怎么……”这里的意思是:尊者啊,我要怎样才能认出那位乔达摩尊者呢?请把能够认出他的方法告诉我。或者,这里的“如何”只是一个不变词。“怎么”是在问方式,意思是:我该用什么方式认出乔达摩尊者呢?巴利
384.Ayaṃ tātāti ayaṃ mahallakatāya gantuṃ asakkonto māṇavaṃ āmantetvā evamāha. Apica esa brāhmaṇo cintesi ‘‘imasmiṃ loke ‘ahaṃ buddho ahaṃ buddho’ti uggatassa nāmaṃ gahetvā bahū janā vicaranti, tasmā na me anussavamatteneva upasaṅkamituṃ yuttaṃ. Ekaccañhi upasaṅkamantassa apakkamanampi garu hoti, anatthopi uppajjati. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ mama antevāsikaṃ pesetvā ‘buddho vā no vā’ti jānitvā upasaṅkameyya’’nti tasmā māṇavaṃ āmantetvā ‘‘ayaṃ tātā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ bhavantanti tassa bhavato. Tathā santaṃyevāti tathā satoyeva. Idañhi itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Yathākathaṃ panāhaṃ, bhoti ettha kathaṃ panāhaṃ, bho, taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ jānissāmi, yathā sakkā so ñātuṃ, tathā me ācikkhāti attho. Yathāti vā nipātamattamevetaṃ. Kathanti ayaṃ ākārapucchā, kenākārenāhaṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ jānissāmīti attho.
听说,当他这样说时,他的戒师对他说:“孩子啊,你这样说,就好像站在大地上却说看不见大地,站在日月的光明中却说看不见日月一样。”接着,戒师为了让他明白认知的方式,说了“孩子啊,在诸咒语中,大人相确实已经传下来了”等话。其中,“在诸咒语中”指的是在吠陀中。据说,如来将要出现之前,净居天的天人们就把大人相的特征放入吠陀中,说“这些叫做佛咒”,然后以婆罗门的身份让人诵读吠陀,心想:“依靠这个传承,有大威力的众生就能认出如来。”因此,从前吠陀中流传着大人相。但如来般涅槃之后,这些内容就逐渐消失了,所以现在没有了。“大人”指的是具足愿力、摄持、智慧、悲悯等功德的大人物。“只有两种去向”就是只有两种归宿。虽然“去向”这个词,在“舍利弗,有五种去向”等说法中指生存的类别,在“兽的去处是山林”等说法中指居住的地方,在“如此有极强去向”等说法中指智慧,在“已去者”等说法中指扩散的状态,但在这里应当知道是指归宿。在这里,虽然具足这些特征而成为国王的人,和具足这些特征而成为佛的人并不相同,但仅从种类相同这一点来说,还是说就是这些特征。因此说“具足这些特征的人”。如果居家,意思是:如果住在家里,就成为转轮王。因为以四种奇特法和四种摄事使世间欢喜,所以叫“王”。他转动轮宝,以四种成就之轮来转动,并以此带动他人,又为了他人利益而运转威仪之轮,所以叫“转轮王”。这里,“王”是一般称呼,“转轮王”是特别说明。“依法而行”就是行于正法,意思是以正当、平等的方式行事。依法获得王位而成为王,所以叫“法王”。或者,做利他之法所以叫“法行者”,做自利之法所以叫“法王”。“于四边自在”就是“四边之主”,意思是对以四海为边、以四洲为庄严的大地拥有自在。“内制服嗔等敌人,外战胜一切国王”,所以叫“征服者”。“国土达到稳固”意思是:国土已达到坚固、恒常的状态,任何人都无法动摇它。或者,国土在他治下达到安稳,没有扰乱,各安其业,不动不摇,所以叫“国土达到稳固”。“所谓”是虚词,意思是“那些是什么”。“轮宝”等中,“轮”又因为能令人喜悦而叫“宝”,所以叫“轮宝”。一切处都可以这样类推。巴利
Evaṃ vutte kira naṃ upajjhāyo – ‘‘kiṃ tvaṃ, tāta, pathaviyaṃ ṭhito pathaviṃ na passāmīti viya candimasūriyānaṃ obhāse ṭhito candimasūriye na passāmīti viya vadasī’’tiādīni vatvā jānanākāraṃ dassento āgatāni kho tātātiādimāha. Tattha mantesūti vedesu. Tathāgato kira uppajjissatīti paṭikacceva suddhāvāsā devā vedesu lakkhaṇāni pakkhipitvā ‘‘buddhamantā nāma ete’’ti brāhmaṇavesena vede vācenti ‘‘tadanusārena mahesakkhā sattā tathāgataṃ jānissantī’’ti. Tena pubbe vedesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni āgacchanti. Parinibbute pana tathāgate anukkamena antaradhāyanti, tena etarahi natthi. Mahāpurisassāti paṇidhisamādānañāṇakaruṇādiguṇamahato purisassa. Dveyeva gatiyoti dve eva niṭṭhā . Kāmañcāyaṃ gatisaddo – ‘‘pañca kho imā , sāriputta, gatiyo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.153) bhavabhede vattati, ‘‘gati migānaṃ pavana’’ntiādīsu (pari. 339) nivāsaṭṭhāne, ‘‘evaṃ adhimattagatimanto’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.161) paññāya, ‘‘gatigata’’ntiādīsu visaṭabhāve, idha pana niṭṭhāyaṃ vattatīti veditabbo. Tattha kiñcāpi yehi samannāgato rājā hoti, na teheva buddho hoti, jātisāmaññato pana tāniyeva tānīti vuccanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘yehi samannāgatassā’’ti. Sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasatīti yadi agāre vasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī. Catūhi acchariyadhammehi saṅgahavatthūhi ca lokaṃ rañjanato rājā. Cakkaratanaṃ vatteti, catūhi sampatticakkehi vatteti, tehi ca paraṃ vatteti, parahitāya ca iriyāpathacakkānaṃ vatto etasmiṃ atthīti cakkavattī. Ettha ca rājāti sāmaññaṃ, cakkavattīti visesanaṃ. Dhammena caratīti dhammiko, ñāyena samena vattatīti attho. Dhammena rajjaṃ labhitvā rājā jātoti dhammarājā. Parahitadhammakaraṇena vā dhammiko, attahitadhammakaraṇena dhammarājā. Caturantāya issaroti cāturanto, catusamuddantāya catubbidhadīpabhūsitāya ca pathaviyā issaroti attho. Ajjhattaṃ kopādipaccatthike bahiddhā ca sabbarājāno vijesīti vijitāvī. Janapadatthāvariyappattoti janapade thāvarabhāvaṃ dhuvabhāvaṃ patto, na sakkā kenaci cāletuṃ, janapado vā tamhi thāvariyappatto anussukko sakammanirato acalo asampavedhīti janapadatthāvariyappatto. Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa tāni katamānīti attho. Cakkaratanantiādīsu cakkañca taṃ ratijananatthena ratanañcāti cakkaratanaṃ. Eseva nayo sabbattha.
在这些宝物当中,这位转轮王靠轮宝征服还没被征服的地方,靠象宝和马宝在已经征服的国土里随心所欲地巡行,靠典兵宝守护已经征服的国土,靠其余几样宝物享受受用的快乐。对他来说,第一样轮宝带来的是精勤力的相应,象宝、马宝和居士宝带来的是支配力的相应,最后一样典兵宝带来的是谋略力的相应,三者都圆满具足,而女宝和珠宝则是这三种力相应所结的果。他靠女宝和珠宝享受受用的快乐,靠其余宝物享受自在的快乐。特别要知道,前面三宝是靠无嗔善根所造之业的威力而成就,中间三宝是靠无贪善根所造之业的威力而成就,最后这一宝是靠无痴善根所造之业的威力而成就。这里是简要的说明,详细的解释应当从《觉支相应》中《宝经》的教导来掌握。另外,在《愚者与贤者经》里,也会连同这些宝物出现的次第一起来说明。巴利
Imesu pana ratanesu ayaṃ cakkavattirājā cakkaratanena ajitaṃ jināti, hatthiassaratanehi vijite yathāsukhaṃ anuvicarati, pariṇāyakaratanena vijitamanurakkhati, sesehi upabhogasukhamanubhavati. Paṭhamena cassa ussāhasattiyogo, hatthiassagahapatiratanehi pabhusattiyogo, pacchimena mantasattiyogo suparipuṇṇo hoti, itthimaṇiratanehi tividhasattiyogaphalaṃ. So itthimaṇiratanehi bhogasukhamanubhavati, sesehi issariyasukhaṃ. Visesato cassa purimāni tīṇi adosakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjanti, majjhimāni alobhakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena, pacchimamekaṃ amohakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvenāti veditabbaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana bojjhaṅgasaṃyutte ratanasuttassa (saṃ. ni. 5.222-223) upadesato gahetabbo. Apica bālapaṇḍitasuttepi (ma. ni. 3.255) imesaṃ ratanānaṃ uppattikkamena saddhiṃ vaṇṇanā āgamissati.
“超过一千”就是多过一千。“勇士”是指天性无所畏惧的人。“具勇士之相的身形”,有些注释者解释为身体像天神一样,但这里真正的意思是:最上等的勇士称为“勇者”。勇者的构成要素就是“勇相”,说的是勇士的成因,也就是精进。具有这种勇相之身形的人,就是“具勇相之形”,意思是他们的身体仿佛是由精进所构成的。“能摧破他军”的意思是:如果敌军正面迎上来,他们有能力将其摧破。“依法”就是指依“不应杀生”等五戒之法。巴利
Parosahassanti atirekasahassaṃ. Sūrāti abhīrukajātikā. Vīraṅgarūpāti devaputtasadisakāyā, evaṃ tāva eke vaṇṇayanti, ayaṃ panettha sabhāvo – vīrāti uttamasūrā vuccanti. Vīrānaṃ aṅgaṃ vīraṅgaṃ, vīrakāraṇaṃ vīriyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vīraṅgaṃ rūpaṃ etesanti vīraṅgarūpā, vīriyamayasarīrā viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Parasenappamaddanāti sace paṭimukhaṃ tiṭṭheyya parasenā, taṃ maddituṃ samatthāti adhippāyo. Dhammenāti ‘‘pāṇo na hantabbo’’tiādinā pañcasīladhammena.
是阿拉汉、正自觉者,在世间揭开了覆盖。这里说的是:世间被贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、无明、恶行这七种覆盖所遮蔽,处在烦恼的黑暗中;他揭开了那些覆盖,成为四面八方都生起光明而安住,所以叫“揭开覆盖者”。其中应当知道:第一个词说明值得供养,第二个词说明它的原因——因为是正自觉者,第三个词说明成为佛陀的原因,也就是揭开覆盖的功德。或者,“揭开覆盖”就是既脱离了轮回的缠缚,又去除了覆盖;也就是说,没有轮回、没有覆盖。这样一来,“阿拉汉”是因为没有轮回,“正自觉者”是因为没有覆盖——由此说明了前两个词各自的原因。再者,这里以第二无畏成就第一,以第一无畏成就第二,以第三、第四无畏成就第三。还应当知道:第一成就法眼,第二成就佛眼,第三成就一切眼。“你是咒语的承受者”——用这句话激发他的勇悍之心。巴利
Arahaṃ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchadoti ettha rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhiavijjāduccaritachadanehi sattahi paṭicchanne kilesandhakāraloke taṃ chadanaṃ vivaṭṭetvā samantato sañjātāloko hutvā ṭhitoti vivaṭṭacchado. Tattha paṭhamena padena pūjārahatā, dutiyena tassā hetu yasmā sammāsambuddhoti, tatiyena buddhattahetubhūtā vivaṭṭacchadatā vuttāti veditabbā. Atha vā vivaṭṭo ca vicchado cāti vivaṭṭacchado, vaṭṭarahito chadanarahito cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena arahaṃ vaṭṭābhāvena, sammāsambuddho chadanābhāvenāti evaṃ purimapadadvayasseva hetudvayaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Dutiyavesārajjena cettha purimasiddhi, paṭhamena dutiyasiddhi, tatiyacatutthehi tatiyasiddhi hoti. Purimañca dhammacakkhuṃ, dutiyaṃ buddhacakkhuṃ, tatiyaṃ samantacakkhuṃ sādhetītipi veditabbaṃ. Tvaṃ mantānaṃ paṭiggahetāti imināssa sūrabhāvaṃ janeti.
385 385. 他听了老师这番话,对诸相也不再迷惑,就像一片光明生起一样,在观察佛陀的诸相时,这样说道:“先生。”这话的意思是:“先生,您对我怎么说,我就照那样去做。”所谓“审察”,就是寻求、探究,或者一边数一边把一相一相地汇集起来。“他见到了”:是怎么见到的呢?因为诸佛坐着或躺着的时候,没有人能寻见他们的相;但站着或经行的时候却能。所以,诸佛看到有人为了寻相而来,就从座位上起身站着,或者决意经行。就这样,他在与见相相适合的威仪中行动时见到了。“大多”:意思是大部分,他见到了许多相,少数没有见到。为了说明那些没见到的相,所以说“除了两相”。“他期望”:生起“啊,但愿我能见到”的希求。“他疑惑”:从各方面对那些相进行思择,觉得困难,无法见到。“他不决定”:由于那种疑惑,不能达到决断。“他不净信”:因此对世尊不能生起“这位具足诸相”的净信。或者,弱的犹豫叫作“疑”,中的叫作“疑惑”,强的叫作“不决定”;而由于不净信,就是由这三种法使心变得污浊的状态。“为衣所覆”:被衣囊遮蔽。“于衣下之私处”:就是生殖器。世尊的生殖器像象王的一样,为衣所覆,呈金色,犹如莲苞。他因为被衣遮蔽,又因为舌入口中,没有察觉到它的广大,所以对这两相生起疑惑、犹豫。巴利
385. Sopi tāya ācariyakathāya lakkhaṇesu vigatasammoho ekobhāsajāto viya buddhamante sampassamāno evaṃ, bhoti āha. Tassattho – yathā, bho, maṃ tvaṃ vadasi, evaṃ karissāmīti. Samannesīti gavesi, ekaṃ dveti vā gaṇayanto samānayi. Addasā khoti kathaṃ addasa? Buddhānañhi nisinnānaṃ vā nipannānaṃ vā koci lakkhaṇaṃ pariyesituṃ na sakkoti, ṭhitānaṃ pana caṅkamantānaṃ vā sakkoti. Tasmā lakkhaṇapariyesanatthaṃ āgataṃ disvā buddhā uṭṭhāyāsanā tiṭṭhanti vā caṅkamaṃ vā adhiṭṭhahanti. Iti lakkhaṇadassanānurūpe iriyāpathe vattamānassa addasa. Yebhuyyenāti pāyena, bahukāni addasa, appāni na addasāti attho. Tato yāni na addasa, tesaṃ dīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ ṭhapetvā dveti. Kaṅkhatīti ‘‘aho vata passeyya’’nti patthanaṃ uppādeti. Vicikicchatīti tato tato tāni vicinanto kicchati na sakkoti daṭṭhuṃ. Nādhimuccatīti tāya vicikicchāya sanniṭṭhānaṃ na gacchati. Na sampasīdatīti tato ‘‘paripuṇṇalakkhaṇo aya’’nti bhagavati pasādaṃ nāpajjati. Kaṅkhāya vā dubbalā vimati vuttā, vicikicchāya majjhimā, anadhimuccanatāya balavatī, asampasādena tehi tīhi dhammehi cittassa kālussiyabhāvo. Kosohiteti vatthikosena paṭicchanne. Vatthaguyheti aṅgajāte. Bhagavato hi vāraṇasseva kosohitavatthaguyhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ padumagabbhasamānaṃ, taṃ so vatthapaṭicchannattā, antomukhagatāya ca jivhāya pahūtabhāvaṃ asallakkhento tesu dvīsu lakkhaṇesu kaṅkhī ahosi vicikicchī.
那时,世尊心里想:“如果我不给他展示这两个相,他就不会没有疑惑。只要他有疑惑,他的老师也就不会没有疑惑,这样一来,他的老师就不会来见我,不来就听不到法,听不到法就不能证得三种沙门果。但如果他没有疑惑,他的老师也就没有疑惑,就会来亲近我,听闻法之后,就能证得三种沙门果。我正是为了这个目的,才圆满了诸巴拉密。我要给他展示这两个相。”巴利
Atha kho bhagavāti atha bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ imassa etāni dve lakkhaṇāni na dassessāmi, nikkaṅkho na bhavissati. Etassa kaṅkhāya sati ācariyopissa nikkaṅkho na bhavissati, atha maṃ dassanāya na āgamissati, anāgato dhammaṃ na sossati, dhammaṃ asuṇanto tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni na sacchikarissati. Etasmiṃ pana nikkaṅkhe ācariyopissa nikkaṅkho maṃ upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṃ sutvā tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni sacchikarissati. Etadatthaṃyeva ca mayā pāramiyo pūritā. Dassessāmissa tāni lakkhaṇānī’’ti.
他变现出那样的一种神通。是什么样的呢?这里还需要别人再说什么吗?这正是那先长老被弥兰陀王问到时所说的:巴利
Tathārūpaṃ iddhābhisaṅkhāramakāsi. Kathaṃrūpaṃ? Kimettha aññena vattabbaṃ? Vuttametaṃ nāgasenatthereneva milindaraññā puṭṭhena –
他说:“尊者那先,世尊做了很难做到的事。” “大王,是什么事?” “尊者,世尊向大众展示了令人生愧的部位,也向布拉玛优婆罗门的学生乌多罗、巴瓦利的学生十六位婆罗门、塞拉婆罗门的学生三百位青年展示了。” “大王,不是的。世尊不展示隐秘处,世尊展示的是影像。世尊以神通变化出穿着下裙、系着腰带、披着上衣的影像而已,大王。” “尊者,见到影像,不就是见到了吗?” “大王,这事先放一边。如果有众生看见心脏的色法就能觉悟,正自觉者就会把心脏的肉取出来给他看。” “尊者那先,您能这样回答,很好。”巴利
Āha ca dukkaraṃ, bhante nāgasena, bhagavatā katanti. Kiṃ mahārājāti? Mahājanena hirikaraṇokāsaṃ brahmāyubrāhmaṇassa ca antevāsiuttarassa ca bāvariyassa antevāsīnaṃ soḷasabrāhmaṇānañca selassa ca brāhmaṇassa antevāsīnaṃ tisatamāṇavānañca dassesi, bhanteti. Na, mahārāja, bhagavā guyhaṃ dasseti, chāyaṃ bhagavā dasseti, iddhiyā abhisaṅkharitvā nivāsananivatthaṃ kāyabandhanabaddhaṃ cīvarapārutaṃ chāyārūpakamattaṃ dassesi mahārājāti. Chāyaṃ diṭṭhe sati diṭṭhoyeva. Nanu, bhanteti? Tiṭṭhatetaṃ, mahārāja, hadayarūpaṃ disvā bujjhanakasatto bhaveyya, hadayamaṃsaṃ nīharitvā dasseyya sammāsambuddhoti. Kallosi, bhante nāgasenāti.
把舌头伸出来,意思是把舌头吐出来。搓揉,是指把舌头弄得像缝衣针一样,然后来回抚摸。应当知道,通过这样的做法,这里显示了舌头的柔软;通过搓揉耳孔,显示了舌头的长;通过搓揉鼻孔,显示了舌头的细;通过覆盖前额,显示了舌头的宽。关于“两个耳孔”等处,诸佛的耳孔里没有污垢或耳垢,就像擦洗干净后放着的银管一样;鼻孔也是如此,它们就像精工打造的金管或宝珠管一样。因此,世尊把舌头伸出来,弄得像缝衣针一样,沿着口腔边缘移动,先伸进右耳孔,再从那里抽出来伸进左耳孔;从那里抽出来后伸进右鼻孔,再从那里抽出来伸进左鼻孔;从那里抽出来后,为了显示舌头的宽大,就用那条像红云遮住的半月、像金盘、又像在红毛毯下闪出电光一样的舌头,覆盖了整个前额区域。巴利
Ninnāmetvāti nīharitvā. Anumasīti kathinasūciṃ viya katvā anumajji. Tathā karaṇena cettha mudubhāvo, kaṇṇasotānumasanena dīghabhāvo, nāsikasotānumasanena tanubhāvo, nalāṭacchādanena puthulabhāvo pakāsitoti veditabbo. Ubhopi kaṇṇasotānītiādīsu cettha buddhānaṃ kaṇṇasotesu malaṃ vā jallikā vā natthi, dhovitvā ṭhapitarajatapanāḷikā viya honti, tathā nāsikasotesu, tānipi hi suparikammakatakañcanapanāḷikā viya ca maṇipanāḷikā viya ca honti. Tasmā jivhaṃ nīharitvā kathinasūciṃ viya katvā mukhapariyante upasaṃharanto dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotaṃ pavesetvā tato nīharitvā vāmakaṇṇasotaṃ pavesesi, tato nīharitvā dakkhiṇanāsikasotaṃ pavesetvā tato nīharitvā vāmanāsikasotaṃ pavesesi, tato nīharitvā puthulabhāvaṃ dassento rattavalāhakena aḍḍhacandaṃ viya ca suvaṇṇapattaṃ viya ca rattakambalapaṭalena vijjujotasadisāya jivhāya kevalakappaṃ nalāṭamaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādesi.
他为什么想“我何不……”呢?因为他观察了大丈夫相之后回去,如果老师问:“孩子,你见到大丈夫相了吗?”他能回答:“是的,老师。”但如果老师接着问:“他的行为举止怎么样?”他就答不上来了。要是他说“我不知道”,老师就会生气:“我不是为了让你了解这一切才派你去的吗?你为什么没弄清楚就回来了?”所以他想了“我何不……”之后,就跟了上去。世尊除了沐浴的地方、洗脸的地方、护理身体的地方、与国王和王臣等后宫眷属一起坐的地方这四处之外,其余所有地方——哪怕是自己单独住的香室——都让他自由进出。巴利
Yaṃnūnāhanti kasmā cintesi? Ahañhi mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni samannesitvā gato ‘‘diṭṭhāni te, tāta, mahāpurisalakkhaṇānī’’ti ācariyena pucchito ‘‘āma, ācariyā’’ti vattuṃ sakkhissāmi. Sace pana maṃ ‘‘kiriyākaraṇamassa kīdisa’’nti pucchissati , taṃ vattuṃ na sakkhissāmi, na jānāmīti vutte pana ācariyo kujjhissati ‘‘nanu tvaṃ mayā sabbampetaṃ jānanatthāya pesito, kasmā ajānitvā āgatosī’’ti, tasmā yannūnāhanti cintetvā anubandhi. Bhagavā nhānaṭṭhānaṃ mukhadhovanaṭṭhānaṃ sarīrapaṭijagganaṭṭhānaṃ rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃ orodhehi saddhiṃ parivāretvā nisinnaṭṭhānanti imāni cattāri ṭhānāni ṭhapetvā sesaṭṭhānesu antamaso ekagandhakuṭiyampi okāsamakāsi.
日子一天天过去,事情渐渐传开了:“听说这位布拉玛优婆罗门的青年优陀罗,为了试探如来到底是不是佛陀,四处游行,大家都叫他‘试探佛陀的人’。”凡是佛陀居住的地方,都有五种固定的日常事务,这些前面已经说过了。其中,午斋之后,世尊坐在装饰好的法座上,拿着象牙装饰的扇子,为大众说法时,优陀罗也坐在不远处。说法结束后,有信心的信众邀请世尊明天来应供,又走到青年面前这样说:“朋友,我们已经请了世尊,也请你跟世尊一起来我们家吃饭。”第二天,如来在比丘僧团的围绕下进入村庄,优陀罗也一步一步紧跟着,观察如来的每一个动作。进入施主家时,从接供水开始,他什么都看在眼里,然后坐下。用斋完毕,如来把钵放在地上坐着的时候,人们才为这位青年准备早斋。他坐在一旁吃完,又回到大师身边,听完饭后随喜开示,然后就跟世尊一起回寺院。巴利
Gacchante gacchante kāle – ‘‘ayaṃ kira brahmāyubrāhmaṇassa māṇavo uttaro nāma ‘buddho vā no vā’ti tathāgatassa buddhabhāvaṃ vīmaṃsanto carati, buddhavīmaṃsako nāmāya’’nti pākaṭo jāto. Yamhi yamhi ṭhāne buddhā vasanti, pañca kiccāni katāneva honti, tāni heṭṭhā dassitāneva . Tattha pacchābhattaṃ alaṅkatadhammāsane nisīditvā dantakhacitaṃ cittabījaniṃ gahetvā mahājanassa dhammaṃ desente bhagavati uttaropi avidūre nisīdati. Dhammassavanapariyosāne saddhā manussā svātanāya bhagavantaṃ nimantetvā māṇavampi upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘tāta, amhehi bhagavā nimantito, tvampi bhagavatā saddhiṃ āgantvā amhākaṃ gehe bhattaṃ gaṇheyyāsī’’ti. Punadivase tathāgato bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto gāmaṃ pavisati, uttaropi padavāre padavāre pariggaṇhanto padānupadiko anubandhati. Kulagehaṃ paviṭṭhakāle dakkhiṇodakaggahaṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbaṃ olokento nisīdati. Bhattakiccāvasāne tathāgatassa pattaṃ bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā nisinnakāle māṇavakassa pātarāsabhattaṃ sajjenti. So ekamante nisinno bhuñjitvā puna āgantvā satthu santike ṭhatvā bhattānumodanaṃ sutvā bhagavatā saddhiṃyeva vihāraṃ gacchati.
这时,世尊在香室里坐着,等比丘们把饭吃完。比丘们吃完饭,收拾好钵和袈裟,回来向世尊顶礼,到了合适的时候禀报之后,世尊就走进香室,那个青年也跟着一起进去。世尊站在香室门口,对围拢过来的比丘僧团做了教诫,把他们打发走之后,就进了香室,青年也跟着进去。世尊在小床上坐了一小会儿,青年也在不远处看着坐下。世尊坐了片刻,就显出要躺下休息的样子。青年心想:“乔达摩尊者该休息了。”于是关上香室的门,出来坐到一边。人们上午布施完,吃过早斋,受了伍波萨他戒,穿着洁净的上衣,手里拿着花环、香料等,想着“我们要去听法”,就来到精舍。那场面就像转轮王的营地一样。巴利
Tattha bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ bhattakiccapariyosānaṃ āgamento gandhamaṇḍalamāḷe nisīdati. Bhikkhūhi bhattakiccaṃ katvā pattacīvaraṃ paṭisāmetvā āgamma vanditvā kāle ārocite bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisati, māṇavopi bhagavatā saddhiṃyeva gacchati. Bhagavā parivāretvā āgataṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ gandhakuṭippamukhe ṭhito ovaditvā uyyojetvā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisati, māṇavopi pavisati. Bhagavā khuddakamañce appamattakaṃ kālaṃ nisīdati, māṇavopi avidūre olokento nisīdati. Bhagavā muhuttaṃ nisīditvā sīsokkamanaṃ dasseti, – ‘‘bhoto gotamassa vihāravelā bhavissatī’’ti māṇavo gandhakuṭidvāraṃ pidahanto nikkhamitvā ekamantaṃ nisīdati. Manussā purebhattaṃ dānaṃ datvā bhuttapātarāsā samādinnauposathaṅgā suddhuttarāsaṅgā mālāgandhādihatthā dhammaṃ suṇissāmāti vihāraṃ āgacchanti, cakkavattino khandhāvāraṭṭhānaṃ viya hoti.
世尊以狮子卧的姿势躺了片刻,起身之后,先以入定的前行阶段划定时间,随后进入等至。从等至出定后,知道大众已经到来,便从香室出来,在众人围绕下前往香坛堂,坐上已经敷设好的最胜佛座,为大众说法。那个青年也在不远处坐着,一字一字、一句一句地仔细审察:“这位沙门乔达摩说法时,到底是在以居家所依的方式抬高或贬低大众呢,还是不是这样?”世尊完全没有说那种话,观察时机到了,就结束了说法。青年用这种方式审察,跟着世尊一起相处了七个月,在世尊的身门等各方面,连极微小的过失都没看到。这并不奇怪:已经成佛的人,一个凡俗青年当然看不出他的过失。而当年世尊还是菩萨、在六年精勤修行期间,身为非人的魔罗天子连一丝居家思虑都找不到;成佛之后,魔罗跟随了一年,也什么都没发现,于是说道:巴利
Bhagavā muhuttaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappetvā vuṭṭhāya pubbabhāgena paricchinditvā samāpattiṃ samāpajjati. Samāpattito vuṭṭhāya mahājanassa āgatabhāvaṃ ñatvā gandhakuṭito nikkhamma mahājanaparivuto gandhamaṇḍalamāḷaṃ gantvā paññattavarabuddhāsanagato parisāya dhammaṃ deseti. Māṇavopi avidūre nisīditvā – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho samaṇo gotamo gehassitavasena parisaṃ ussādento vā apasādento vā dhammaṃ deseti, udāhu no’’ti akkharakkharaṃ padaṃ padaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Bhagavā tathāvidhaṃ kathaṃ akathetvāva kālaṃ ñatvā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Māṇavo iminā niyāmena pariggaṇhanto satta māse ekato vicaritvā bhagavato kāyadvārādīsu aṇumattampi avakkhalitaṃ na addasa. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ buddhabhūtassa manussabhūto māṇavo na passeyya, yassa bodhisattabhūtassa chabbassāni padhānabhūmiyaṃ amanussabhūto māro devaputto gehassitavitakkamattampi adisvā buddhabhūtaṃ ekasaṃvaccharaṃ anubandhitvā kiñci apassanto –
“ 七年之中,我步步紧随世尊,
我没能找到那位正自觉者、具念者的任何可乘之机。”巴利
‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ; Otāraṃ nādhigacchissaṃ, sambuddhassa satīmato’’ti. (su. ni. 448) –
说完开头的那些偈颂后,他就离开了。接着,那个青年心里想:“我跟着乔达摩尊者七个月,一点过失都没看到。就算我再跟着他七个月、七年,甚至一百年、一千年,也还是看不到他有什么过失。可是我的老师已经老了,人的安危寿命无常,是不可预知的。我应该把沙门乔达摩凭自身本有的功德就是佛这件事说清楚,然后去告诉我的老师。”于是他向世尊告辞,礼敬了比丘僧团,就离开了。巴利
Ādigāthāyo vatvā pakkāmi. Tato māṇavo cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ satta māse anubandhamāno kiñci vajjaṃ na passāmi. Sace panāhaṃ aññepi satta māse satta vā vassāni vassasataṃ vā vassasahassaṃ vā anubandheyyaṃ, nevassa vajjaṃ passeyyaṃ. Ācariyo kho panassa me mahallako, yogakkhemaṃ nāma na sakkā jānituṃ. Samaṇassa gotamassa sabhāvaguṇeneva buddhabhāvaṃ vatvā mayhaṃ ācariyassa ārocessāmī’’ti bhagavantaṃ āpucchitvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vanditvā nikkhami.
他走到老师那里,老师问他:“亲爱的孩子优多罗,关于那位乔达摩尊者的名声,是不是真的像传说的那样,他本人确实如此呢?”他回答说:“老师,您说什么呢?对乔达摩尊者来说,整个轮围世界都太狭窄了,连有顶天都太低了。因为这位乔达摩尊者的功德之聚,就像虚空一样没有边际。确实如此,贤者,那位乔达摩尊者就是这样的……”说完这些之后,他按顺序讲述了自己亲眼所见的三十二大人相,又讲述了他的行为举止。因此经中说:“那时,优多罗青年……这位乔达摩尊者是这样这样,而且还不止如此。”巴利
Ācariyassa santikañca pana gantvā – ‘‘kacci, tāta uttara, taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ tathāsantaṃyeva saddo abbhuggato’’ti pucchito, ‘‘ācariya, kiṃ vadesi? Cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ, bhavaggaṃ atinīcaṃ, tassa hi, bhoto gotamassa ākāsaṃ viya apariyanto guṇagaṇo. Tathāsantaṃyeva, bho, taṃ bhavantaṃ gotama’’ntiādīni vatvā yathādiṭṭhāni dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭipāṭiyā ācikkhitvā kiriyasamācāraṃ ācikkhi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho uttaro māṇavo…pe… ediso ca ediso ca bhavaṃ gotamo tato ca bhiyyo’’ti.
386 386. 其中,“足善安立”:一般人把脚放到地上时,要么是脚掌前端、要么是脚跟、要么是脚侧先碰到地,要么中间留有空隙;抬脚时,也只是脚掌前端等某一个部分先抬起。世尊不是这样。世尊的脚,就像金鞋的鞋底一样,整个脚掌一下子同时碰到地面,又同时离开地面。因此说:“那位乔达摩尊者确实是足善安立者。”巴利
386. Tattha suppatiṭṭhitapādoti yathā hi aññesaṃ bhūmiyaṃ pādaṃ ṭhapentānaṃ aggatalaṃ vā paṇhi vā passaṃ vā paṭhamaṃ phusati, vemajjhaṃ vā pana chiddaṃ hoti, ukkhipantānampi aggatalādīsu ekakoṭṭhāsova paṭhamaṃ uṭṭhahati, na evaṃ tassa. Tassa pana suvaṇṇapādukatalaṃ viya ekappahāreneva sakalaṃ pādatalaṃ bhūmiṃ phusati, bhūmito uṭṭhahati. Tasmā ‘‘suppatiṭṭhitapādo kho pana so bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti vadati.
关于世尊“足善安立”这一点,情况是这样的:即使世尊伸出脚,心想“我要踏进几百人深的深渊”,那低洼的地方当下就会像被风灌满的铁匠风箱一样鼓起来,变得和地面一样平;高起的地方也会陷下去。当他向前伸脚,心想“我要踏到远处”时,即使像须弥山那么大的山,也会像蒸软的藤芽一样弯下来,来到他脚边。正是如此,世尊示现双神变后,心想“我要踏上持双山”,伸脚时那座山就弯下来到了他脚边;他踏上那座山,用另一只脚跨上了三十三天。因为以足之轮相所应安立之处,不可能是不平坦的。木桩、荆棘、碎石瓦砾、大小便、唾沫鼻涕等,都会事先自行消失,就地没入地中。凭借如来的戒德之力、智慧之力、法之力,以及十种巴拉密的威神力,这大地变得平坦柔软,遍满鲜花。在那里,如来平正地放下脚,平正地抬起脚,用整个脚掌触地。巴利
Tatridaṃ bhagavato suppatiṭṭhitapādatāya – sacepi hi bhagavā anekasataporisaṃ narakaṃ akkamissāmīti pādaṃ nīharati, tāvadeva ninnaṭṭhānaṃ vātapūritaṃ viya kammārabhastaṃ unnamitvā pathavīsamaṃ hoti, unnataṭṭhānampi anto pavisati. Dūre akkamissāmīti abhinīharantassa sineruppamāṇopi pabbato seditavettaṅkuro viya namitvā pādasamīpaṃ āgacchati. Tathā hissa yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā yugandharapabbataṃ akkamissāmīti pāde abhinīharato pabbato namitvā pādasamīpaṃ āgato, so taṃ akkamitvā dutiyapādena tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ akkami. Na hi cakkalakkhaṇena patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānaṃ visamaṃ bhavituṃ sakkoti. Khāṇu vā kaṇḍako vā sakkharakathalā vā uccārapassāvo vā kheḷasiṅghāṇikādīni vā purimatarāva apagacchanti, tattha tattheva ca pathaviṃ pavisanti. Tathāgatassa hi sīlatejena paññātejena dhammatejena dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ ānubhāvena ayaṃ mahāpathavī samā mudu pupphābhikiṇṇā hoti. Tatra tathāgato samaṃ pādaṃ nikkhipati, samaṃ uddharati, sabbāvantehi pādatalehi bhūmiṃ phusati.
所谓“轮”,就是两只脚底上各有一个轮相。这些轮的辐、轮辋和轮毂,经文里已经说过了。而“一切形貌都圆满”这一句,要这样理解它的特别之处:据说,在那些轮的脚掌中央,能看见轮毂;能看见由轮毂划出的圆形线条;能看见围绕轮毂的一圈带状区域;能看见毂孔;能看见辐条;在辐条之间能看见圆形线条;能看见轮辋;还能看见轮辋上的小环。这些都属于经文里已经说到的内容。巴利
Cakkānīti dvīsu pādesu dve cakkāni. Tesaṃ arā ca nemi ca nābhi ca pāḷiyaṃ vuttāva. Sabbākāraparipūrānīti iminā pana ayaṃ viseso veditabbo – tesaṃ kira cakkānaṃ pādatalassa majjhe nābhi dissati, nābhiparicchinnā vaṭṭalekhā dissati, nābhimukhaparikkhepapaṭṭo dissati, panāḷimukhaṃ dissati, arā dissanti, aresu vaṭṭalekhā dissanti, nemī dissanti, nemimaṇikā dissanti. Idaṃ tāva pāḷiāgatameva.
不过“众多回”这一部分经典里没有,应当这样来看:矛、吉祥、牛犊、喜旋、卍字、耳环、增长、双鱼、吉祥座、钩、刺棒、宫殿、拱门、白伞、剑、扇、孔雀尾扇、拂尘、头巾、钵、宝珠、花鬘、青莲、红莲、白莲、莲花、白睡莲、满瓶、满盘、大海、轮围山、雪山、须弥山、日月、星宿、四大洲、二千小洲,乃至转轮王的随从在内,这一切都是轮相的附属。巴利
Sambahulavāro pana anāgato, so evaṃ daṭṭhabbo – satti siri vaccho nandi sovattiko vaṭaṃsako vaḍḍhamānakaṃ macchayugalaṃ bhaddapīṭhaṃ aṅkusaṃ tomaro pāsādo toraṇaṃ setacchattaṃ khaggo tālavaṇṭaṃ morahatthako vāḷabījanī uṇhīsaṃ patto maṇi kusumadāmaṃ nīluppalaṃ rattuppalaṃ setuppalaṃ padumaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ puṇṇaghaṭo puṇṇapāti samuddo cakkavāḷo himavā sineru candimasūriyā nakkhattāni cattāro mahādīpā dveparittadīpasahassāni, antamaso cakkavattirañño parisaṃ upādāya sabbo cakkalakkhaṇasseva parivāro.
“足跟广长”是指脚跟长,意思是脚跟饱满圆润。一般人脚的前端长,小腿正好落在脚跟的顶端,脚跟就像被削平了再安上去一样;如来却不是这样。如来的脚分为四个部分:前两个部分是脚的前端,第三部分是小腿所落之处,第四部分则是脚跟,像用锥子旋成的一样圆隆,如同红色毛毯做成的球。巴利
Āyatapaṇhīti dīghapaṇhi, paripuṇṇapaṇhīti attho. Yathā hi aññesaṃ aggapādo dīgho hoti, paṇhimatthake jaṅghā patiṭṭhāti, paṇhi tacchetvā ṭhapitā viya hoti, na evaṃ tathāgatassa . Tathāgatassa pana catūsu koṭṭhāsesu dve koṭṭhāsā aggapādo hoti, tatiye koṭṭhāse jaṅghā patiṭṭhāti, catutthe koṭṭhāse āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitā viya rattakambale geṇḍukasadisā paṇhi hoti.
“手指纤长”:一般人的手指,有的长,有的短,如来不是这样。如来的手指和脚趾,如同猿猴的一样,是长的手指和脚趾,根部粗,越往指尖越细,好像用树脂油揉过之后捻成的雌黄棒。所以经中说“手指纤长”。巴利
Dīghaṅgulīti yathā aññesaṃ kāci aṅguli dīghā hoti, kāci rassā, na evaṃ tathāgatassa. Tathāgatassa pana makkaṭasseva dīghahatthapādaṅguliyo mūle thūlā anupubbena gantvā agge tanukā niyyāsatelena madditvā vaṭṭitaharitālavaṭṭisadisā honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dīghaṅgulī’’ti.
手足柔软:就像把棉絮片浸入酥油精后放置,经过百次捶打那样柔软;又像刚出生的婴儿一样,手脚任何时候都细嫩。所以叫手足柔软。巴利
Mudutalunahatthapādoti sappimaṇḍe osādetvā ṭhapitaṃ satavāravihatakappāsapaṭalaṃ viya mudū, jātamattakumārassa viya ca niccakālaṃ talunā ca hatthapādā assāti mudutalunahatthapādo.
“手足网缦”并不是指手指之间由皮肤连在一起。因为像那样手指间有蹼的人,是身体有缺陷的人,连出家都不被允许。而如来的四根手指和五根脚趾,每一根都同样长短;因为长短一致,麦粒纹互相交错而立。这样一来,他的手和脚就像巧匠制作的网格窗一样。因此说“手足网缦”。巴利
Jālahatthapādoti na cammena paṭibaddhaaṅgulantaro. Ediso hi phaṇahatthako purisadosena upahato pabbajjampi na labhati. Tathāgatassa pana catasso hatthaṅguliyo pañcapi pādaṅguliyo ekappamāṇā honti, tāsaṃ ekappamāṇattāya yavalakkhaṇaṃ aññamaññaṃ paṭivijjhitvā tiṭṭhati. Athassa hatthapādā kusalena vaḍḍhakinā yojitajālavātapānasadisā honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jālahatthapādo’’ti.
脚踝高耸、位置偏上,所以叫“脚踝高隆之足”。别人的脚踝长在脚背后面,因此他们的脚就像被钉住一样僵硬,不能随意转动,走路时也看不到脚掌。而如来的脚踝则高高隆起,位于上方。因此,从肚脐以上的上半身,就像安放在船上的金像一样纹丝不动,只有下半身活动。双脚能轻松转动。无论站在前方、后方还是两侧看的人,都能看见如来的脚掌,不像大象那样只能从后面才看得到。巴利
Uddhaṃ patiṭṭhitagopphakattā ussaṅkhā pādā assāti ussaṅkhapādo. Aññesañhi piṭṭhipāde gopphakā honti. Tena tesaṃ pādā āṇibaddhā viya thaddhā honti, na yathāsukhaṃ parivattanti, gacchantānaṃ pādatalāni na dissanti . Tathāgatassa pana abhiruhitvā upari gopphakā patiṭṭhahanti. Tenassa nābhito paṭṭhāya uparimakāyo nāvāya ṭhapitasuvaṇṇapaṭimā viya niccalo hoti, adhokāyova iñjati. Sukhena pādā parivattanti. Puratopi pacchatopi ubhayapassesupi ṭhatvā passantānaṃ pādatalāni paññāyanti, na hatthīnaṃ viya pacchatoyeva.
小腿像羚羊腿:也就是说,小腿像羚羊的腿一样,肌肉丰满而圆润饱满。它不是那种只有一处结成硬块的小腿肚,而是四周都有均匀分布的肌肉包裹,长得圆润美好,像稻谷里的胚芽一样。这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Eṇijaṅghoti eṇimigasadisajaṅgho maṃsussadena paripuṇṇajaṅgho, na ekato baddhapiṇḍikamaṃso , samantato samasaṇṭhitena maṃsena parikkhittāhi suvaṭṭitāhi sāligabbhasadisāhi jaṅghāhi samannāgatoti attho.
不弯腰:就是不弯曲身体。这说明他的身体既不驼背,也不矮小。因为其他的人,要么是驼背,要么是矮小。驼背的人上半身不完整,矮小的人下半身不完整。他们因为身体不完整,没办法不弯腰就摸到膝盖。而如来因为上下半身都完整,所以能做到。巴利
Anonamantoti anamanto. Etenassa akhujjaavāmanabhāvo dīpito. Avasesajanā hi khujjā vā honti vāmanā vā, khujjānaṃ uparimakāyo aparipuṇṇo hoti, vāmanānaṃ heṭṭhimakāyo. Te aparipuṇṇakāyattā na sakkonti anonamantā jaṇṇukāni parimajjituṃ. Tathāgato pana paripuṇṇaubhayakāyattā sakkoti.
就像公牛、大象等那样,生殖器藏在像金色莲花花蕊一样的鞘膜里,被覆盖着不露出来,所以叫马阴藏相。所谓密处,就是指应当用衣服遮覆的生殖器官。巴利
Usabhavāraṇādīnaṃ viya suvaṇṇapadumakaṇṇikasadise kose ohitaṃ paṭicchannaṃ vatthaguyhaṃ assāti kosohitavatthaguyho. Vatthaguyhanti vatthena gūhitabbaṃ aṅgajātaṃ vuccati.
“金色”的意思是:用天然朱砂研磨,再用豹牙摩擦,然后涂上赭石粉处理,做成之后放置着的纯金雕像那样。这是先显示他的身体坚实、润泽、柔软,然后为了说明肤色而说“肤似黄金”;或者说,这句只是前面“金色”的另一种说法。巴利
Suvaṇṇavaṇṇoti jātihiṅgulakena majjitvā dīpidāṭhāya ghaṃsitvā gerukaparikammaṃ katvā ṭhapitaghanasuvaṇṇarūpakasadisoti attho. Etenassa ghanasiniddhasaṇhasarīrataṃ dassetvā chavivaṇṇadassanatthaṃ kañcanasannibhattacoti vuttaṃ, purimassa vā vevacanameva etaṃ.
尘土和污垢,就是灰尘或垢秽。不沾染,就是不附着,像水珠从荷叶上滚落一样。不过,洗手、洗脚等做法,佛陀是为了顺应时节气候,也是为了让布施者获得福报,而且是依照仪轨来做的。因为教导中说过:比丘进入住处时,应当先洗脚再进去。巴利
Rajojallanti rajo vā malaṃ vā. Na upalimpatīti na laggati, padumapalāsato udakabindu viya vivaṭṭati. Hatthadhovanapādadhovanādīni pana utuggahaṇatthāya ceva dāyakānaṃ puññaphalatthāya ca buddhā karonti, vattasīsenāpi ca karontiyeva. Senāsanaṃ pavisantena hi bhikkhunā pāde dhovitvā pavisitabbanti vuttametaṃ.
身毛上靡:在发旋的末端,毛发向上竖起,仿佛正仰望着面容的光辉而站立着;拥有这样的毛发,就叫身毛上靡。巴利
Uddhaggalomoti āvaṭṭapariyosāne uddhaggāni hutvā mukhasobhaṃ ullokayamānāni viya ṭhitāni lomāni assāti uddhaggalomo.
梵身正直:是说身体像梵天神那样端正挺直,笔直而高大。因为大多数众生在肩、腰、膝这三个地方会弯曲。腰弯曲的人向后弓,另外两处则向前弯。有些身材高大的人身体侧弯,有些人仰着头走路,好像在数星星;有些人血肉瘦薄,像尖刺一样,走起路来还摇摇晃晃。而如来则完全笔直挺拔,身形高大,就像天城之中竖立的金色牌楼一样。巴利
Brahmujugattoti brahmā viya ujugatto, ujumeva uggatadīghasarīro. Yebhuyyena hi sattā khandhe kaṭiyaṃ jāṇūsūti tīsu ṭhānesu namanti. Te kaṭiyaṃ namantā pacchato namanti, itaresu dvīsu ṭhānesu purato. Dīghasarīrā paneke passavaṅkā honti, eke mukhaṃ unnāmetvā nakkhattāni gaṇayantā viya caranti, eke appamaṃsalohitā sūlasadisā honti, pavedhamānā gacchanti. Tathāgato pana ujumeva uggantvā dīghappamāṇo devanagare ussitasuvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya hoti.
七处隆满:是指两个手背、两个脚背、两个肩头和颈项这七个地方肌肉饱满隆起,所以叫七处隆满。其他人的手背和脚背上,筋脉都看得出来,肩头和颈项上骨端凸出,他们看起来就像人饿鬼一样,如来不是这样。如来因为这七个地方肌肉圆满丰腴,手背等处的筋脉都被肉包住隐没不见,颈项就像磨圆的黄金柱一样,看上去宛如石雕像或彩绘之像。巴利
Sattussadoti dve hatthapiṭṭhiyo dve pādapiṭṭhiyo dve aṃsakūṭāni khandhoti imesu sattasu ṭhānesu paripuṇṇamaṃsussado assāti sattussado. Aññesaṃ pana hatthapādapiṭṭhīsu nhārujālā paññāyanti, aṃsakūṭakhandhesu aṭṭhikoṭiyo, te manussapetā viya khāyanti, na tathāgato. Tathāgato pana sattasu ṭhānesu paripuṇṇamaṃsussadattā nigūḷhanhārujālehi hatthapiṭṭhādīhi vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitasuvaṇṇavaṇṇāliṅgasadisena khandhena silārūpakaṃ viya cittakammarūpakaṃ viya ca khāyati.
像狮子的前半身一样,他的身体就是“狮子上半身”。因为狮子的前半身圆满,后半身不圆满。而如来的整个身体,则完全像狮子的前半身那样圆满。而且他的身体也像狮子一样,不会这里那里地弯曲、凹凸,显得歪斜不正、松散不整;该长的地方就长,该短、该细、该粗、该圆的地方,也都正好那样。对此确实说过:巴利
Sīhassa pubbaddhaṃ viya kāyo assāti sīhapubbaddhakāyo. Sīhassa hi puratthimakāyova paripuṇṇo hoti, pacchimakāyo aparipuṇṇo. Tathāgatassa pana sīhassa pubbaddhakāyova sabbo kāyo paripuṇṇo. Sopi sīhasseva na tattha tattha vinatunnatādivasena dussaṇṭhitavisaṇṭhito, dīghayuttaṭhāne pana dīgho, rassakisathūlaanuvaṭṭitayuttaṭṭhānesu tathāvidhova hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,当悦意的业果成熟显现时,那些以长为美的身体部位,就长成长的;那些以短为美的身体部位,就长成短的;那些以粗壮为美的身体部位,就长成粗壮的;那些以纤细为美的身体部位,就长成纤细的;那些以圆润为美的身体部位,就长成圆润的。巴利
‘‘Manāpiye ca kho, bhikkhave, kammavipāke paccupaṭṭhite yehi aṅgehi dīghehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni dīghāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi rassehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni rassāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi thūlehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni thūlāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi kisehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni kisāni saṇṭhahanti. Yehi aṅgehi vaṭṭehi sobhati, tāni aṅgāni vaṭṭāni saṇṭhahantī’’ti.
如来之身,由种种心、由福德心所构筑,又以十巴拉密为庄严;世间一切技艺精湛之人或拥有神通者,连仿造一个相似之身都做不到。巴利
Iti nānācittena puññacittena cittito dasahi pāramīhi sajjito tathāgatassa attabhāvo, tassa loke sabbasippino vā iddhimanto vā paṭirūpakampi kātuṃ na sakkonti.
“肩间饱满”是指两肩胛骨之间的部位称为“肩间”,如来的这个部位充实圆满,所以叫“肩间饱满”。其他人的这个部位是凹陷的,两片肩胛骨各自分明可见。而如来从腰部开始,肌肉层向上隆起,覆盖住背部,就像竖立的金板一样,一直延伸到肩部。巴利
Citantaraṃsoti antaraṃsaṃ vuccati dvinnaṃ koṭṭānamantaraṃ, taṃ citaṃ paripuṇṇamassāti citantaraṃso. Aññesañhi taṃ ṭhānaṃ ninnaṃ hoti, dve piṭṭhikoṭṭā pāṭiyekkaṃ paññāyanti. Tathāgatassa pana kaṭito paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭalaṃ yāva khandhā uggamma samussitasuvaṇṇaphalakaṃ viya piṭṭhiṃ chādetvā patiṭṭhitaṃ.
“如榕树般圆整”的意思是:像榕树一样圆整。榕树无论高五十肘还是一百肘,树干和枝条都匀称,纵向和横向一样大小;同样,如来的身体和两臂展开的长度也相等。也就是说,不像其他人的身体那样,或者身子长而臂展短,或者臂展长而身子短,而是没有这种不均等。正因为这样,才说“如其身”等话。其中,“如其身”就是与他的身量相应。巴利
Nigrodhaparimaṇḍaloti nigrodho viya parimaṇḍalo. Yathā paṇṇāsahatthatāya vā satahatthatāya vā samakkhandhasākho nigrodho dīghatopi vitthāratopi ekappamāṇova hoti, evaṃ kāyatopi byāmatopi ekappamāṇo. Yathā aññesaṃ kāyo vā dīgho hoti byāmo vā, na evaṃ visamappamāṇoti attho. Teneva ‘‘yāvatakvassa kāyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yāvatako assāti yāvatakvassa.
肩头圆满,意思是肩膀长得圆整匀称。有些人脖子长得像鹭,像白鹭,或者像猪,有的脖子长,有的脖子弯,有的脖子粗;他们说话的时候,青筋暴起,声音又弱又小。如来不是这样。如来的肩膀就像打磨得很好的金色门闩一样圆整匀称,说话的时候青筋不露,声音洪亮,像打雷的云一样。巴利
Samavaṭṭakkhandhoti samavaṭṭitakkhandho. Yathā eke koñcā viya bakā viya varāhā viya ca dīghagalā vaṅkagalā puthulagalā ca honti, kathanakāle sirājālaṃ paññāyati, mando saro nikkhamati, na evaṃ tassa. Tathāgatassa pana suvaṭṭitasuvaṇṇāliṅgasadiso khandho hoti, kathanakāle sirājālaṃ na paññāyati, meghassa viya gajjato saro mahā hoti.
“味端顶尖”这个说法里,“尝味”就是味端,这是对味觉通道的称呼;那些通道是最顶尖的,所以叫“味端顶尖”。如来的七千条味觉通道都朝上,正好汇集在颈部。哪怕只是芝麻那么大的一点食物放在舌尖上,也能遍及全身。因此,如来在修大精进时,仅靠一粒米等,甚至一捧豆粥,也能维持身体。别人没有这种能力,养分不能遍满全身,所以他们多病。这个特相,就是通过被称为“少病”的等流果而显现出来的。巴利
Rasaggasaggīti ettha rasaṃ gasantīti rasaggasā , rasaharaṇīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tā aggā assāti rasaggasaggī. Tathāgatassa hi satta rasaharaṇisahassāni uddhaggāni hutvā gīvāyameva paṭimukkāni. Tilaphalamattopi āhāro jivhagge ṭhapito sabbaṃ kāyaṃ anupharati, teneva mahāpadhānaṃ padahantassa ekataṇḍulādīhipi kāḷāyayūsapasatenāpi kāyassa yāpanaṃ ahosi. Aññesaṃ pana tathā abhāvā na sakalakāyaṃ ojā pharati, tena te bahvābādhā honti. Idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ appābādhatāsaṅkhātassa nissandaphalassa vasena pākaṭaṃ hoti.
“狮子颚”是指像狮子一样的颚。其中,狮子的下颚才是圆满的,上颚则不圆满。但如来的上下两颚都像狮子的下颚一样圆满,宛如十二日的月亮。巴利
Sīhasseva hanu assāti sīhahanu. Tattha sīhassa heṭṭhimahanumeva paripuṇṇaṃ hoti, na uparimaṃ. Tathāgatassa pana sīhassa heṭṭhimaṃ viya dvepi paripuṇṇāni dvādasiyaṃ pakkhassa candasadisāni honti.
在“四十齿”等说法中,上颚安住二十颗牙,下颚二十颗,合起来就是四十颗牙,所以叫“四十齿”。其他人即使牙齿齐全,也只有三十二颗牙,而如来有四十颗。巴利
Cattālīsadantotiādīsu uparimahanuke patiṭṭhitā vīsati, heṭṭhime vīsatīti cattālīsa dantā assāti cattālīsadanto. Aññesañhi paripuṇṇadantānampi dvattiṃsa dantā honti, tathāgatassa cattālīsaṃ.
别人的牙齿有的高、有的低,参差不齐;而如来的牙齿却像被锯开的贝壳片一样平整。巴利
Aññesañca keci dantā uccā keci nīcāti visamā honti, tathāgatassa pana ayapaṭṭachinnasaṅkhapaṭalaṃ viya samā.
别人的牙齿像鳄鱼的牙齿一样稀疏,吃鱼肉之类的东西时,牙缝里就会塞满。而如来的牙齿却像由金藤竖立起来的金刚列一样,紧密无间,又像用画笔划出的界线一样分明。巴利
Aññesaṃ kumbhīlānaṃ viya dantā viraḷā honti, macchamaṃsādīni khādantānaṃ dantantaraṃ pūrati. Tathāgatassa pana kanakalatāya samussāpitavajirapanti viya aviraḷā tulikāya dassitaparicchedā viya dantā honti.
牙齿极其洁白:其他人的牙齿会生腐坏,因此有些牙齿发黑、变色。而如来牙齿极其洁白,其光明甚至超过晨星,所以称为“牙齿极其洁白”。巴利
Susukkadāṭhoti aññesañca pūtidantā uṭṭhahanti, tena kāci dāṭhā kāḷāpi vivaṇṇāpi honti. Tathāgato susukkadāṭho osadhitārakampi atikkamma virocamānāya pabhāya samannāgatadāṭho, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘susukkadāṭho’’ti.
广长舌:别人的舌头,有的粗厚,有的细薄,有的短小,有的僵硬,有的歪斜不平。而如来的舌头则是柔软的、修长的、宽大的,而且色泽圆满。为了消除前来寻求这一相的人心中的疑惑,他因为舌头柔软的的缘故,把舌头卷起来,像卷起一根粗针那样,能够碰到两个鼻孔;因为修长的缘故,能够碰到两个耳孔;因为宽大的缘故,能够覆盖整个发际乃至全部额头。这样显示他的舌头柔软、修长、宽大,从而消除疑惑。如此,针对具足这三种特征的舌头,才说“广长舌”。巴利
Pahūtajivhoti aññesaṃ jivhā thūlāpi hoti kisāpi rassāpi thaddhāpi visamāpi, tathāgatassa pana mudu dīghā puthulā vaṇṇasampannā hoti. So taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ pariyesituṃ āgatānaṃ kaṅkhāvinodanatthaṃ mudukattā taṃ jivhaṃ kathinasūciṃ viya vaṭṭetvā ubho nāsikasotāni parāmasati, dīghattā ubho kaṇṇasotāni parāmasati, puthulattā kesantapariyosānaṃ kevalampi nalāṭaṃ paṭicchādeti. Evaṃ tassā mududīghaputhulabhāvaṃ pakāsento kaṅkhaṃ vinodeti. Evaṃ tilakkhaṇasampannaṃ jivhaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pahūtajivho’’ti vuttaṃ.
梵音:别人的声音有的是断的,有的是破的,还有像乌鸦叫一样的。如来却具足与大梵天王相似的声音。因为大梵天王的声音不被胆汁和痰等阻碍,所以清净。如来所造的业净化了发声的部位,由于这个部位清净,声音从脐部开始生起时,就是清净的,而且具足八种特质。“像迦陵频伽鸟那样发声”,意思是像求偶期的迦陵频伽鸟那样,发出美妙的声音。巴利
Brahmassaroti aññe chinnassarāpi bhinnassarāpi kākassarāpi honti, tathāgato pana mahābrahmuno sarasadisena sarena samannāgato. Mahābrahmuno hi pittasemhehi apalibuddhattā saro visuddho hoti. Tathāgatenāpi katakammaṃ vatthuṃ sodheti, vatthussa suddhattā nābhito paṭṭhāya samuṭṭhahanto saro visuddho aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatova samuṭṭhāti. Karaviko viya bhaṇatīti karavikabhāṇī, mattakaravikarutamañjughosoti attho.
关于迦陵频伽叫声的美妙,这里要说明一下:据说,迦陵频伽鸟用喙啄破甘甜的熟芒果,尝了流出来的果汁,然后拍打翅膀鸣叫起来。这时,四足众生等就像喝醉了一样,开始嬉戏起舞。正在吃草的四足动物,也把嘴里的草吐掉,来听这个声音;猛兽正在追赶小动物时,抬起的脚还没放下就停住了;被追赶的动物也不顾死亡的恐惧,站在那里不动;在空中飞翔的鸟也展开翅膀停住了;水里的鱼也拍打着耳膜,一边听这个声音一边停在那里。迦陵频伽的美妙就是这样的。巴利
Tatridaṃ karavikarutassa mañjutāya – karavikasakuṇe kira madhurarasaṃ ambapakkaṃ mukhatuṇḍakena paharitvā paggharitaṃ rasaṃ sāyitvā pakkhena tālaṃ datvā vikūjamāne catuppadādīni mattāni viya laḷituṃ ārabhanti. Gocarappasutāpi catuppadā mukhagatānipi tiṇāni chaḍḍetvā taṃ saddaṃ suṇanti, vāḷamigā khuddakamige anubandhamānā ukkhittapādaṃ anukkhipitvāva tiṭṭhanti, anubaddhamigāpi maraṇabhayaṃ hitvāpi tiṭṭhanti, ākāse pakkhandapakkhinopi pakkhe pasāretvā tiṭṭhanti, udake macchāpi kaṇṇapaṭalaṃ apphoṭentā taṃ saddaṃ suṇamānāva tiṭṭhanti. Evaṃ mañjurutā karavikā.
阿桑迪弥塔是法阿育王的王后。她问僧团:“尊者,有没有谁的声音和佛陀的声音相似?”僧团回答:“有,迦陵频伽鸟的声音。”她又问:“尊者,那种鸟在哪里?”
答:“在雪山。”她便对国王说:“大王,我想见迦陵频伽鸟。”国王说:“让迦陵频伽鸟坐进这个笼子,把它带来。”于是放出一只金笼。金笼飞到一只迦陵频伽鸟面前停住。那只鸟心想:“这笼子是奉王命来的,不能不去。”就坐了进去。金笼飞回来,停在国王面前。大家怎么也没法让迦陵频伽鸟发出叫声。国王就问:“这鸟要怎么才会叫?”有人答:“大王,要让它见到同类。”于是国王让人用镜子把它围起来。那鸟看见自己的影子,以为“同类来了”,便振翅拍击,发出像吹奏宝笛一样美妙的鸣声。整个城里的人都像喝醉了一样欢闹起来。阿桑迪弥塔心想:“这畜生都有这么甜美的声音,那已经证得一切知智、具足吉祥的世尊,他的声音该是怎样的呢?”她生起欢喜,持续沉浸在这份欢喜中,和七百名侍女一起证得了入流果。迦陵频伽的声音就是这般甜美。而如来的声音比它甜美百倍、千倍。不过,世间除了迦陵频伽的声音之外,再没有别的更甜美的声音了,所以才说如来是“迦陵频伽音者”。巴利
Asandhimittāpi dhammāsokassa devī – ‘‘atthi nu kho, bhante, buddhasaddena sadiso kassaci saddo’’ti saṅghaṃ pucchi. Atthi karavikasakuṇassāti. Kuhiṃ, bhante, sakuṇāti? Himavanteti. Sā rājānaṃ āha, – ‘‘deva, karavikasakuṇaṃ daṭṭhukāmā’’ti. Rājā ‘‘imasmiṃ pañjare nisīditvā karaviko āgacchatū’’ti suvaṇṇapañjaraṃ vissajjesi. Pañjaro gantvā ekassa karavikassa purato aṭṭhāsi. So ‘‘rājāṇāya āgato pañjaro, na sakkā agantu’’nti tattha nisīdi. Pañjaro āgantvā rañño puratova aṭṭhāsi. Karavikaṃ saddaṃ kārāpetuṃ na sakkonti. Atha rājā ‘‘kathaṃ bhaṇe ime saddaṃ karontī’’ti āha? Ñātake disvā devāti. Atha naṃ rājā ādāsehi parikkhipāpesi. So attanova chāyaṃ disvā ‘‘ñātakā me āgatā’’ti maññamāno pakkhena tāḷaṃ datvā mañjussarena maṇivaṃsaṃ dhamamāno viya viravi. Sakalanagare manussā mattā viya laḷiṃsu. Asandhimittā cintesi – ‘‘imassa tāva tiracchānassa evaṃ madhuro saddo, kīdiso nu kho sabbaññutaññāṇasirippattassa bhagavato ahosī’’ti pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ pītiṃ avijahitvā sattahi jaṅghasatehi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Evaṃ madhuro karavikasaddo. Tato satabhāgena sahassabhāgena ca madhurataro tathāgatassa saddo, loke pana karavikato aññassa madhurarassa abhāvato ‘‘karavikabhāṇī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“绀青眼”并不是说整只眼睛都是青色的。在眼睛呈现青色的部位,他的双眼带着像乌摩花一样极其纯净的青色;在呈现黄色的部位,带着像迦尼迦罗花一样的黄色;在呈现红色的部位,带着像般度吉瓦迦花一样的红色;在呈现白色的部位,带着像晨星一样的白色;在呈现黑色的部位,带着像黑石一样的黑色。这双眼睛看起来,就像金殿中打开的宝石狮子窗一样。巴利
Abhinīlanettoti na sakalanīlanettova, nīlayuttaṭṭhāne panassa umāpupphasadisena ativisuddhena nīlavaṇṇena samannāgatāni akkhīni honti. Pītayuttaṭṭhāne kaṇikārapupphasadisena pītavaṇṇena, lohitayuttaṭṭhāne bandhujīvakapupphasadisena lohitavaṇṇena, setayuttaṭṭhāne osadhitārakasadisena setavaṇṇena, kāḷayuttaṭṭhāne addāriṭṭhakasadisena kāḷavaṇṇena samannāgatāni suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjarasadisāni khāyanti.
这里说的“牛睫”,其中的“睫”指的是整个眼睛。黑牛犊的眼睛厚实,红牛犊的眼睛则非常清澈明亮。意思是说,如来的眼睛就像刚出生那一刻的红牛犊的眼睛那样。其他人的眼睛都不圆满,像象、鼠、乌鸦等动物的眼睛,有的凸出,有的深陷。而如来的眼睛,就像清洗擦拭后安放的宝珠,睫毛柔软光滑,呈深蓝色,纤细密布。巴利
Gopakhumoti ettha pakhumanti sakalaṃ cakkhubhaṇḍaṃ adhippetaṃ. Taṃ kāḷavacchakassa bahaladhātukaṃ hoti, rattavacchakassa vippasannaṃ, taṃmuhuttajātarattavacchasadisacakkhubhaṇḍoti attho. Aññesañhi akkhibhaṇḍā aparipuṇṇā honti, hatthimūsikakākādīnaṃ akkhisadisehi viniggatehi gambhīrehipi akkhīhi samannāgatā honti. Tathāgatassa pana dhovitvā majjitvā ṭhapitamaṇiguḷikā viya mudusiniddhanīlasukhumapakhumācitāni akkhīni.
白毫就是那根白毫毛。说“眉间”,是指两眉正中、鼻梁上方那个位置生出来的。长出来之后,则生在额头中央。说“白色”,是极清净的,像晨星那样的色泽。说“柔软”,就像沉淀在生酥里、经过上百次捶打的棉絮一样。“如棉絮一般”,是像木棉絮、拉达棉絮那样,这是就它白色的方面所作的比喻。而这一根白毫,如果捏住末端往外拉,能拉到半臂那么长;一松手,便向右旋绕,向上竖起,安住不动。它就像放在金板中央的银珠,像从金瓶里流出的乳汁,又像朝霞映照的路面上那颗晨星,以极其悦意的祥瑞之光而闪耀。巴利
Uṇṇāti uṇṇalomaṃ. Bhamukantareti dvinnaṃ bhamukānaṃ vemajjhe nāsikamatthakeyeva jātā. Uggantvā pana nalāṭamajjhajātā. Odātāti parisuddhā osadhitārakavaṇṇā. Mudūti sappimaṇḍe osādetvā ṭhapitasatavāravihatakappāsapaṭalasadisā. Tūlasannibhāti simbalitūlalatātūlasamānā, ayamassā odātatāya upamā. Sā panesā koṭiyaṃ gahetvā ākaḍḍhiyamānā upaḍḍhabāhuppamāṇā hoti, vissaṭṭhā dakkhiṇāvaṭṭavasena āvaṭṭitvā uddhaggā hutvā santiṭṭhati, suvaṇṇaphalakamajjhe ṭhapitarajatapupphuḷakā viya suvaṇṇaghaṭato nikkhamamānā khīradhārā viya aruṇappabhārañjite gamanatale osadhitārakā viya ca atimanoharāya siriyā virocati.
顶髻相这个说法,是依据两种含义而说的:一是额头圆满,二是整个头部圆满。如来的额头,从右耳尖开始,有一层肌肉隆起,覆盖并充满整个额头,一直延伸到左耳尖安住下来,就像国王缠着的顶巾一样光彩夺目。据说,人们知悉最后有身菩萨的这个相后,才为国王们制作了顶巾。这是第一种含义。其他人则头部不圆满:有些像猴头,有些像果头,有些像骨突头,有些像葫芦头,有些像岩壁凹陷的头。而如来的头,就像用锥尖旋削而成,极其圆满,像水泡一样。按照前一种解释,就像用顶巾缠裹的头,所以叫顶髻相;按照后一种解释,就像顶巾那样处处圆满的头,所以叫顶髻相。巴利
Uṇhīsasīsoti idaṃ paripuṇṇanalāṭatañceva paripuṇṇasīsatañcāti dve atthavase paṭicca vuttaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi dakkhiṇakaṇṇacūḷikato paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭalaṃ uṭṭhahitvā sakalaṃ nalāṭaṃ chādayamānaṃ pūrayamānaṃ gantvā vāmakaṇṇacūḷikāya patiṭṭhitaṃ, rañño baddhauṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocati. Pacchimabhavikabodhisattānaṃ kira imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ viditvā rājūnaṃ uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ akaṃsu, ayaṃ tāva eko attho. Aññe pana janā aparipuṇṇasīsā honti, keci kappasīsā, keci phalasīsā, keci aṭṭhisīsā, keci tumbasīsā, keci pabbhārasīsā. Tathāgatassa pana āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaṃ viya suparipuṇṇaṃ udakapupphuḷasadisaṃ sīsaṃ hoti. Tattha purimanayena uṇhīsaveṭhitasīso viyāti uṇhīsasīso. Dutiyanayena uṇhīsaṃ viya sabbattha parimaṇḍalasīsoti uṇhīsasīso.
不过,如果要讲这些大人相,就得在每一个相里都说明四部分:业、与业相似的特征、相本身、相的功德,这样才算讲得好。所以,世尊在《相经》(《长部》3.200–202)里所说的这些业等内容,应当依此展示解说。如果单凭经文本身无法确定,就应按照《善喜光明》——《长部注》中对那部经的注释所说的方法来把握。巴利
Imāni pana mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni kammaṃ kammasarikkhakaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ lakkhaṇānisaṃsanti ime cattāro koṭṭhāse ekekasmiṃ lakkhaṇe dassetvā kathitāni sukathitāni honti. Tasmā bhagavatā lakkhaṇasutte (dī. ni. 3.200-202) vuttāni imāni kammādīni dassetvā kathetabbāni . Suttavasena vinicchituṃ asakkontena sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya tasseva suttassa vaṇṇanāya vuttanayena gahetabbāni.
贤者们,这位尊贵的乔达摩。老师啊,这位尊贵的乔达摩具足这三十二大人相,就像天城之中高高矗立、众宝庄严的金色拱门;就像高达一百由旬、满树繁花的昼度树;就像山岩间开满花朵的娑罗树;又像群星点缀的天空。他仿佛以自身的威德光辉,让整个世界都亮了起来,就这样行走。说明了这层含义之后,为了讲述他的威仪行持,经中接着说了“而他正在前行时”等等。巴利
Imehi kho, bho, so bhavaṃ gotamoti, bho ācariya, imehi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi so bhavaṃ gotamo samannāgato devanagare samussitaratanavicittaṃ suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya yojanasatubbedho sabbapāliphullo pāricchattako viya selantaramhi supupphitasālarukkho viya tārāgaṇapaṭimaṇḍitagaganatalamiva ca attano sirivibhavena lokaṃ ālokaṃ kurumāno viya caratīti imatthampi dīpetvā kiriyācāraṃ ācikkhituṃ gacchanto kho panātiādimāha.
387 “以右足”:因为诸佛无论站着、坐着还是躺着,要起步行走时,总是右脚先向前。据说这是一种持续不断的示现。他抬脚时想“不把脚放得太远”,所以抬起右脚时不会把它放得太远。因为如果右脚送得太远,左脚被拖向前时也会跟着走,右脚自己也没法迈得远,只能落在近处,这样一来步距就断裂了。而如果右脚按适当的距离抬起,左脚也按适当的距离抬起;按适当距离抬起后,落脚时也按适当距离落下。应当知道,就这样,如来的右脚动作由左脚来限定,左脚动作由右脚来限定。巴利
387.Dakkhiṇenāti buddhānañhi ṭhatvā vā nisīditvā vā nipajjitvā vā gamanaṃ abhinīharantānaṃ dakkhiṇapādova purato hoti. Satatapāṭihāriyaṃ kiretaṃ. Nātidūrepādaṃ uddharatīti taṃ dakkhiṇapādaṃ na atidūre ṭhapessāmīti uddharati. Atidūrañhi abhihariyamāne dakkhiṇapādena vāmapādo ākaḍḍhiyamāno gaccheyya, dakkhiṇapādopi dūraṃ gantuṃ na sakkuṇeyya, āsanneyeva patiṭṭhaheyya, evaṃ sati padavicchedo nāma hoti. Dakkhiṇapāde pana pamāṇeneva uddhate vāmapādopi pamāṇeneva uddhariyati, pamāṇena uddhato patiṭṭhahantopi pamāṇeyeva patiṭṭhāti. Evamanena tathāgatassa dakkhiṇapādakiccaṃ vāmapādena niyamitaṃ, vāmapādakiccaṃ dakkhiṇapādena niyamitanti veditabbaṃ.
不急速:他走路不会太快,不像比丘为了去日间住处或乞食而赶路那样走得太快。不迟缓:不会慢到像后面来的人找不到落脚空间那样,走得过于迟缓。膝与膝:膝盖与膝盖相触。不抬高大腿:不会像在深水里行走那样高抬大腿。不向后拖:不会像用钩杖砍树枝的人那样把脚向后拖。不僵直:不会像在绑缚或未绑缚之处顿脚那样把脚弄得僵硬。不弯曲摇摆:不会像摆弄机关木偶那样把脚这里那里地晃动。只有下半身动:只有下半身移动,上半身就像放在船上的金像一样纹丝不动。因为从远处看的人,根本分不清佛是站着还是在行走。不以身体之力:他不是靠甩动手臂、身体流汗那种体力在走。以整个身体:他回视时不转动脖子,而是像《罗睺罗教诫经》里所说的大象回望那样,用整个身体来回视。巴利
Nātisīghanti divā vihārabhattatthāya gacchanto bhikkhu viya na atisīghaṃ gacchati. Nātisaṇikanti yathā pacchato āgacchanto okāsaṃ na labhati, evaṃ na atisaṇikaṃ gacchati. Adduvena adduvanti jaṇṇukena jaṇṇukaṃ, nasatthiṃ unnāmetīti gambhīre udake gacchanto viya na ūruṃ unnāmeti. Na onāmetīti rukkhasākhāchedanadaṇḍaṅkusapādo viya na pacchato osakkāpeti. Na sannāmetīti obaddhānābaddhaṭṭhānehi pādaṃ koṭṭento viya na thaddhaṃ karoti. Navināmetīti yantarūpakaṃ kīḷāpento viya na ito cito ca cāleti. Adharakāyovāti heṭṭhimakāyova iñjati, uparimakāyo nāvāya ṭhapitasuvaṇṇapaṭimā viya niccalo hoti. Dūre ṭhatvā olokento hi buddhānaṃ ṭhitabhāvaṃ vā gamanabhāvaṃ vā na jānāti . Kāyabalenāti bāhā khipanto sarīrato sedehi muccantehi na kāyabalena gacchati. Sabbakāyenevāti gīvaṃ aparivattetvā rāhulovāde vuttanāgāpalokitavaseneva apaloketi.
在“不向上看”等句子里:他不像数星星那样抬头往上看,也不像在找丢失的一点点小钱那样低头往下看,也不像看大象、马之类那样东张西望地走路。“一轭量”:把视线放在前方大约九拃远的地方走路,这就叫“视一轭量”。世尊也像套在轭里的、调教得很好的良马一样,只看着这么远的范围往前走。但不能因此就说“他超越于此”——不能说他一轭量之外就看不见了。因为墙壁、门扇、树丛、藤蔓都挡不住他,而他那无遮无碍的智慧,能让几千个轮围世界像一座庭院一样呈现在眼前。“入民居”:在下面的《大萨咕伦达义经》里,“民居”是从城门的门槛算起;这里则要从屋宅的门槛算起。“不以身……”等句,是为了说明世尊就是以平常的姿态走进去。就算走进穷人的低矮小屋,对如来来说,要么屋顶自然升高,要么大地自然下沉,世尊仍然以平常走路的姿态走进去。“不过远”:如果转身时离得太远,就得后退一两步才能坐下。“不过近”:如果转身时离得太近,就得向前一两步才能坐下。所以,他就在转身站定的那个位置,不必向前或向后移动就能坐下。巴利
Na uddhantiādīsu nakkhattāni gaṇento viya na uddhaṃ ulloketi, naṭṭhaṃ kākaṇikaṃ vā māsakaṃ vā pariyesanto viya na adho oloketi, na hatthiassādayo passanto viya ito cito ca vipekkhamāno gacchati. Yugamattanti navavidatthimatte cakkhūni ṭhapetvā gacchanto yugamattaṃ pekkhati nāma, bhagavāpi yuge yutto sudantaājānīyo viya ettakaṃ passanto gacchati. Tato cassa uttarīti yugamattato paraṃ na passatīti na vattabbo. Na hi kuṭṭaṃ vā kavāṭaṃ vā gaccho vā latā vā āvarituṃ sakkoti, atha khvassa anāvaraṇañāṇassa anekāni cakkavāḷasahassāni ekaṅgaṇāneva honti. Antaragharanti heṭṭhā mahāsakuludāyisutte indakhīlato paṭṭhāya antaragharaṃ, idha gharaummārato paṭṭhāya veditabbaṃ. Nakāyantiādi pakatiiriyapatheneva pavisatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Daliddamanussānaṃ nīcagharakaṃ pavisantepi hi tathāgate chadanaṃ vā uggacchati, pathavī vā ogacchati, bhagavā pana pakatigamaneneva gacchati. Nātidūreti atidūre parivattantena hi ekaṃ dve padavāre piṭṭhibhāgena gantvā nisīditabbaṃ hoti. Nāccāsanneti accāsanne parivattantena ekaṃ dve padavāre purato gantvā nisīditabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā yasmiṃ padavāre ṭhitena purato vā pacchato vā agantvā nisīditabbaṃ hoti, tattha parivattati.
用手:他不像患腰风病的人那样用手抓着座位坐下。投身坐下:有人做完某件事后,嬉戏般站着就猛然倒下坐;或者靠着座位这一边坐下后,蹭着挪到那一边;或者靠着那一边坐下后,同样蹭着挪回这一边——这些都叫把身体抛向座位。但世尊不这样做,他像在座位中央托持着悬垂物、像安放棉絮一样,轻轻地坐下。手的不安分:指在钵口边缘放水滴、用蝇拂切叶子等,用手做出不调伏的动作。脚的不安分:指用脚蹭地等,用脚做出不调伏的动作。巴利
Pāṇināti kaṭivātābādhiko viya na āsanaṃ hatthehi gahetvā nisīdati. Pakkhipatīti yo kiñci kammaṃ katvā kīḷanto ṭhitakova patati, yopi orimaṃ aṅgaṃ nissāya nisinno ghaṃsanto yāva pārimaṅgā gacchati, pārimaṅgaṃ vā nissāya nisinno tatheva yāva orimaṅgā āgacchati, sabbo so āsane kāyaṃ pakkhipati nāma. Bhagavā pana evaṃ akatvā āsanassa majjhe olambakaṃ dhārento viya tūlapicuṃ ṭhapento viya saṇikaṃ nisīdati. Hatthakukkuccanti pattamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ udakabinduṭhapanaṃ makkhikabījaniyā paṇṇacchedanaphālanādi hatthena asaṃyatakaraṇaṃ. Pādakukkuccanti pādena bhūmighaṃsanādi asaṃyatakaraṇaṃ.
不害怕:就是不恐惧。不颤动:就是不陷落。不摇动:就是不晃动。不惊慌:就是既不因恐惧而惊慌,也不因渴爱而惊慌。有些人为了说法等事来到这里,看到众人礼敬自己时,会因为恐惧而惊慌,心想:“我能把握他们的心来说法吗?有人提问我能回答吗?我能做餐后随喜吗?”另一些人则因为渴爱而惊慌,心想:“会不会有合我口味的粥送来?有没有可口的点心?”这两种惊慌他都没有,所以说不惊慌。心转向远离:心朝向远离、朝向涅槃。也可以读作vivekavatto,意思是具足远离之行。所谓远离之行,就是比丘吃完饭、完成该做的事之后,在白天休息的地方,以止观修习根本业处,盘腿坐下。这样坐着的人,他的威仪是寂静的。巴利
Na chambhatīti na bhāyati. Na kampatīti na osīdati. Na vedhatīti na calati. Naparitassatīti bhayaparitassanāyapi taṇhāparitassanāyapi na paritassati. Ekacco hi dhammakathādīnaṃ atthāya āgantvā manussesu vanditvā ṭhitesu ‘‘sakkhissāmi nu kho tesaṃ cittaṃ gaṇhanto dhammaṃ vā kathetuṃ, pañhaṃ vā pucchito vissajjetuṃ, bhattānumodanaṃ vā kātu’’nti bhayaparitassanāya paritassati. Ekacco ‘‘manāpā nu kho me yāgu āgacchissati, manāpaṃ antarakhajjaka’’nti vā taṇhāparitassanāya paritassati. Tadubhayampi tassa natthīti na paritassati. Vivekāvaṭṭoti viveke nibbāne āvaṭṭamānaso hutvā. Vivekavattotipi pāṭho, vivekavattayutto hutvāti attho. Vivekavattaṃ nāma katabhattakiccassa bhikkhuno divāvihāre samathavipassanāvasena mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdanaṃ. Evaṃ nisinnassa hi iriyāpatho upasanto hoti.
不把钵举高:这里说的是,有些人倒水时,像是要把水从钵口边缘送进去一样,把钵举高;有人像是把钵放在脚背上一样,把钵放低;有人把钵抓紧固定住;有人让钵左右晃动。比丘不这样做,而是用双手拿钵,稍微倾斜,然后接水,这就是这里的意思。不翻转:不是先把钵翻过来洗钵底。不太远:不是像有人那样,把水丢到离座位很远的地方。不太近:不是就倒在脚边。洒净:是分散地倒,不是像有人那样倒得接水的人被溅湿。巴利
Na pattaṃ unnāmetītiādīsu ekacco pattamukhavaṭṭiyā udakadānaṃ āharanto viya pattaṃ unnāmeti, eko pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapento viya onāmeti, eko baddhaṃ katvā gaṇhāti, eko ito cito ca phandāpeti, evaṃ akatvā ubhohi hatthehi gahetvā īsakaṃ nāmetvā udakaṃ paṭiggaṇhātīti attho. Na samparivattakanti parivattetvā paṭhamameva pattapiṭṭhiṃ na dhovati. Nātidūreti yathā nisinnāsanato dūre patati, na evaṃ chaḍḍeti. Nāccāsanneti pādamūleyeva na chaḍḍeti. Vicchaḍḍayamānoti vikiranto, yathā paṭiggāhako temati, na evaṃ chaḍḍeti.
不太多:不像某些心怀恶欲却装作少欲的人那样,只抓一把的量,他不是这样。过多:指超过维持身体所需的份量。依佐料之量:所谓佐料之量,就是饭菜的四分之一。有人遇到合口味的饭就多取饭,遇到合口味的佐料就多取佐料。导师不这样取用。不以佐料过量:如果有人放下不喜欢的佐料只吃饭,或者放下饭只吃佐料,这就叫以佐料过量。导师是饭和佐料交替取用,让饭和佐料同时吃完。二三次:对如来来说,以广长舌送到牙齿边的食物,只被牙齿碰两三次,就像精细研磨的涂身香粉一样细滑,所以这样说。口中不留余粒:就像水珠落在莲叶上会滑落一样,食物一转身就顺喉而下,所以口中不残留。觉知味:甘、苦、涩等味道他都清楚知道。对诸佛来说,就连喝的水也仿佛融入了天界美味,所以他们对一切味道都明明了了,但心中没有对味道的贪著。巴利
Nātithokanti yathā ekacco pāpiccho appicchataṃ dassento muṭṭhimattameva gaṇhāti, na evaṃ. Atibahunti yāpanamattato atirekaṃ. Byañjanamattāyāti byañjanassa mattā nāma odanato catuttho bhāgo. Ekacco hi bhatte manāpe bhattaṃ bahuṃ gaṇhāti, byañjane manāpe byañjanaṃ bahuṃ. Satthā pana tathā na gaṇhāti. Na ca byañjanenāti amanāpañhi byañjanaṃ ṭhapetvā bhattameva bhuñjanto, bhattaṃ vā ṭhapetvā byañjanameva khādanto byañjanena ālopaṃ atināmeti nāma. Satthā ekantarikaṃ byañjanaṃ gaṇhāti, bhattampi byañjanampi ekatova niṭṭhanti. Dvattikkhattunti tathāgatassa hi puthujivhāya dantānaṃ upanītabhojanaṃ dvattikkhattuṃ dantehi phuṭṭhamattameva saṇhakaraṇīyapiṭṭhavilepanaṃ viya hoti, tasmā evamāha. Na mukhe avasiṭṭhāti pokkharapatte patitaudakabindu viya vinivattitvā paragalameva yāti, tasmā avasiṭṭhā na hoti. Rasapaṭisaṃvedīti madhuratittakadukādirasaṃ jānāti. Buddhānañhi antamaso pānīyepi dibbojā pakkhittāva hoti, tena nesaṃ sabbattheva raso pākaṭo hoti, rasagedho pana natthi.
具足八支:所谓“不为嬉戏”等,就是具足八种支分。它的详细判定见于《清净道论》,这是依《一切漏经》所说的。双手洗净后:导师怎么做呢?他先洗净放钵的地方,然后拿起钵,把带有细密网纹的手伸进去,来回转两遍。到这时,水就像落在莲叶上一样,滚落流走。并非不在意:不像有些人把钵放在钵架上,不擦干钵里的水,灰尘落进去也毫不在乎,导师不这样做。也不过度守护:不像有些人设立过度的守护,比如吃完饭把钵里的水擦干,把钵塞进衣内,用肚子压着拿,导师不这样做。巴利
Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘neva davāyā’’ti vuttehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Visuddhimagge panassa vinicchayo āgatoti sabbāsavasutte vuttametaṃ. Hatthesu dhotesūti satthā kiṃ karoti? Paṭhamaṃ pattassa gahaṇaṭṭhānaṃ dhovati. Tattha pattaṃ gahetvā sukhumajālahatthaṃ pesetvā dve vāre sañcāreti. Ettāvatā pokkharapatte patitaudakaṃ viya vinivattitvā gacchati. Na ca anatthikoti yathā ekacco pattaṃ ādhārake ṭhapetvā patte udakaṃ na puñchati, raje patante ajjhupekkhati, na evaṃ karoti. Na ca ativelānurakkhīti yathā ekacco pamāṇātikkantaṃ ārakkhaṃ ṭhapeti, bhuñjitvā vā patte udakaṃ puñchitvā cīvarabhogantaraṃ pavesetvā pattaṃ udarena akkamitvā gaṇhāti, na evaṃ karoti.
不拖延随喜:如果有人刚吃完饭,在孩子们为了吃饭而哭闹、人们还饿着肚子的时候,就马上开始作随喜,结果有些人放下手头所有事情赶过来,有些人还没到,这就拖延了时间。又或者,当人们为了听随喜而前来礼敬、坐下之后,他还不作随喜,就先一个个地搭话:“帝萨怎么样?普萨怎么样?苏摩那怎么样?帝萨怎么样?普萨怎么样?苏摩那怎么样?你们身体都还好吗?庄稼收成好吗?”这样也是拖延了随喜的时间。而世尊是了解众人的时机、在大家请求时才作随喜,所以不算拖延。巴利
Na ca anumodanassāti yo hi bhuttamattova dārakesu bhattatthāya rodantesu chātajjhattesu manussesu bhuñjitvā anāgatesveva anumodanaṃ ārabhati, tato sabbakammāni chaḍḍetvā ekacce āgacchanti, ekacce anāgatāva honti, ayaṃ kālaṃ atināmeti. Yopi manussesu āgantvā anumodanatthāya vanditvā nisinnesu anumodanaṃ akatvāva ‘‘kathaṃ tissa, kathaṃ phussa, kathaṃ sumana, kathaṃ tisse, kathaṃ phusse, kathaṃ sumane, kaccittha arogā, sassaṃ sampanna’’ntiādiṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, ayaṃ anumodanassa kālaṃ atināmeti, manussānaṃ pana okāsaṃ ñatvā āyācitakāle karonto nātināmeti nāma, satthā tathā karoti.
他不会挑剔说“这算什么饭,米没煮熟、太烂了”之类的话来嫌恶食物。也不期待别的食物:有人一边随喜一边心想“我明天或后天再让他们煮饭来”,这就是在期待别的食物。又或者有人想:“等女人们把饭煮好,我再作随喜,随喜结束时她们也许会从自己煮好的饭里分一点给我”,这样把随喜拖长,也叫期待。导师不这样做。也不想着赶紧脱身:有人混在人群里悄悄溜走,得赶紧追上去。导师不会那样离开,他站在大众中间才走。过高:有人把衣提到下巴以上披着,就是过高;有人把衣垂到脚踝以下披着,也是过高;有人把两边提起来、露出肚子走路,也是过高;有人偏袒一肩、露出胸部走路,也是过高。导师完全不会这样做。巴利
Na taṃ bhattanti kiṃ bhattaṃ nāmetaṃ uttaṇḍulaṃ atikilinnantiādīni vatvā na garahati. Naaññaṃ bhattanti svātanāya vā punadivasāya vā bhattaṃ uppādessāmīti hi anumodanaṃ karonto aññaṃ bhattaṃ paṭikaṅkhati. Yo vā – ‘‘yāva mātugāmānaṃ bhattaṃ paccati, tāva anumodanaṃ karissāmi, atha me anumodanāvasāne attano pakkabhattatopi thokaṃ dassantī’’ti anumodanaṃ vaḍḍheti, ayampi paṭikaṅkhati nāma. Satthā na evaṃ karoti. Na ca muccitukāmoti ekacco hi paṭisaṃmuñcitvā gacchati, vegena anubandhitabbo hoti. Satthā pana na evaṃ gacchati, parisāya majjhe ṭhitova gacchati. Accukkaṭṭhanti yo hi yāva hanukaṭṭhito ukkhipitvā pārupati, tassa accukkaṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti. Yo yāva gopphakā otāretvāva pārupati, tassa accukkaṭṭhaṃ hoti. Yopi ubhato ukkhipitvā udaraṃ vivaritvā yāti, tassapi accukkaṭṭhaṃ hoti. Yo ekaṃsaṃ katvā thanaṃ vivaritvā yāti, tassapi accukkaṭṭhaṃ. Satthā taṃ sabbaṃ na karoti.
贴身:就像别人的衣服被汗水浸湿后会黏在身上,世尊的衣服不会这样。远离:不像麻布那样从身体上脱离悬空。风:即使是旋风刮起,也不能吹动它。从事装饰脚:指用砖块摩擦等方式来修饰双脚。洗足:指用自己的脚搓洗另一只脚。他不为自我折磨等话:并不是因为世尊有宿住随念智和他心智才这样说,而是看到世尊的威仪持续安稳后,通过推断而说的。法:指教法。不抬举:不会说“你是大家族出身吗?你是大富豪吗?”这类话,不会以攀附世俗人家的方式抬举人。不轻慢:不会说“怎么,近事男,你是怎么认识来精舍的路的?你是因为害怕才不来吗?比丘们并不会抢夺任何东西,别怕”,也不会说“你这样吝啬的生活算什么”这类话,不会以攀附世俗人家的情感来轻慢人。巴利
Allīnanti yathā aññesaṃ sedena tintaṃ allīyati, na evaṃ satthu. Apakaṭṭhanti khalisāṭako viya kāyato muccitvāpi na tiṭṭhati. Vātoti verambhavātopi uṭṭhahitvā cāletuṃ na sakkoti. Pādamaṇḍanānuyoganti iṭṭhakāya ghaṃsanādīhi pādasobhānuyogaṃ. Pakkhāletvāti pādeneva pādaṃ dhovitvā. So neva attabyābādhāyātiādīni na pubbenivāsacetopariyañāṇānaṃ atthitāya vadati, iriyāpathasantataṃ pana disvā anumānena vadati. Dhammanti pariyattidhammaṃ. Na ussādetīti kiṃ mahāraṭṭhika, kiṃ mahākuṭumbikātiādīni vatvā gehassitavasena na ussādeti. Na apasādetīti ‘‘kiṃ, upāsaka, kathaṃ te vihāramaggo ñāto? Kiṃ bhayena nāgacchasi? Na hi bhikkhū kiñci acchinditvā gaṇhanti, mā bhāyī’’ti vā ‘‘kiṃ tuyhaṃ evaṃ macchariyajīvitaṃ nāmā’’ti vā ādīni vatvā gehassitapemena na apasādeti.
流畅:柔和,没有滞碍。可解:能让人明了,清晰;正因为流畅,所以可解。悦耳:甜美。动听:令耳欢喜;正因为甜美,所以动听。凝聚:紧密聚合。不散:不流散;正因为凝聚,所以不散。甚深:从深处生起。回荡:有回荡之声;正因为甚深,所以有回荡。随受众:能令以轮围为边际的一切无间大众,无不清晰了知。在外:声音不会超出大众之外,哪怕一指节的距离。为何如此?为使这样甜美的音声不致无端消散。因此,世尊的音声只在大众的头顶上传扬。巴利
Vissaṭṭhoti siniddho apalibuddho. Viññeyyoti viññāpanīyo pākaṭo, vissaṭṭhattāyeva cesa viññeyyo hoti. Mañjūti madhuro. Savanīyoti sotasukho, madhurattāyeva cesa savanīyo hoti. Bindūti sampiṇḍito. Avisārīti avisaṭo, binduttāyeva cesa avisārī hoti. Gambhīroti gambhīrasamuṭṭhito. Ninnādīti ninnādavā, gambhīrattāyeva cesa ninnādī hoti. Yathāparisanti cakkavāḷapariyantampi ekābaddhaparisaṃ viññāpeti. Bahiddhāti aṅgulimattampi parisato bahiddhā na gacchati. Tasmā? So evarūpo madhurassaro akāraṇā mā nassīti. Iti bhagavato ghoso parisāya matthakeneva carati.
“瞻视着”:把合掌举到头顶,一边注视着世尊,一边倒退着走,直到看不见世尊的地方,才礼拜后离去。“以不离之性”:有的人听完说法起身后,边走边谈论别的见闻之类的事,从本性上说,这就叫离去;但有的人边走边只是赞叹所听闻的法义,这就叫不离。他们就是以这样不离的方式离开。“行走着”:像被绳子牵引一样行走,如同七宝高的金色尖顶饰柱。“我们见屹立”:像一座矗立的金山那样屹立着,我们看见了。“且更超过”:因为无法详尽地称扬他的功德,就把余下的功德概括起来,像捆成一束、用线绑住一样,然后这样说道。这里的意趣是:我所宣说的功德,比起未宣说的,后者要多得多。因为那位尊者的功德无量、不可测度,犹如大地、大海,又如虚空一般周遍弥漫。巴利
Avalokayamānāti sirasmiṃ añjaliṃ ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ olokentāva paccosakkitvā dassanavijahanaṭṭhāne vanditvā gacchanti. Avijahitattāti yo hi kathaṃ sutvā vuṭṭhito aññaṃ diṭṭhasutādikaṃ kathaṃ kathento gacchati, esa sabhāvena vijahati nāma. Yo pana sutadhammakathāya vaṇṇaṃ kathentova gacchati, ayaṃ na vijahati nāma, evaṃ avijahantabhāvena pakkamanti. Gacchantanti rajjuyantavasena ratanasattubbedhaṃ suvaṇṇagghikaṃ viya gacchantaṃ. Addasāma ṭhitanti samussitakañcanapabbataṃ viya ṭhitaṃ addasāma. Tato ca bhiyyoti vitthāretvā guṇe kathetuṃ asakkonto avasese guṇe saṃkhipitvā kalāpaṃ viya suttakabaddhaṃ viya ca katvā vissajjento evamāha. Ayamettha adhippāyo – mayā kathitaguṇehi akathitāva bahutarā. Mahāpathavimahāsamuddādayo viya hi tassa bhoto anantā appameyyā guṇā ākāsamiva vitthāritāti.
390 “未被察觉”是指别人没察觉他来了。去拜访出家人时,如果正赶上他们在处理袈裟等事务,或者只穿着下衣、正在涂抹身体的时候前去,那就只能从那里直接折返,连打个招呼都谈不上。但如果事先让人安排好地方,把日间休息处打扫干净,披好袈裟,比丘在僻静处坐下,来人见到之后,光是看到就会生起信心,问候也就有了,还能得到答问或听法的机会。所以有智慧的人会让人事先安排好地方。他就是他们当中的一位,因此当时这样想。“年老、年长”:他为什么不说明自己已经提升了地位,却这样说呢?因为佛陀们充满悲悯,知道是长老,就会尽快让出地方,所以才这样说。巴利
390.Appaṭisaṃviditoti aviññātaāgamano. Pabbajite upasaṅkamantena hi cīvaraparikammādisamaye vā ekaṃ nivāsetvā sarīrabhañjanasamaye vā upasaṅkamitvā tatova paṭinivattitabbaṃ hoti, paṭisanthāramattampi na jāyati. Puretaraṃ pana okāse kārite divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā bhikkhu vivitte ṭhāne nisīdati, taṃ āgantvā passantā dassanenapi pasīdanti, paṭisanthāro jāyati, pañhabyākaraṇaṃ vā dhammakathā vā labbhati. Tasmā paṇḍitā okāsaṃ kārenti. So ca nesaṃ aññataro, tenassa etadahosi. Jiṇṇo vuḍḍhoti attano uggatabhāvaṃ akathetvā kasmā evamāha? Buddhā nāma anuddayasampannā honti, mahallakabhāvaṃ ñatvā sīghaṃ okāsaṃ karissatīti evamāha.
391 他退开后让出了空间,意思是:迅速起身,将(人群)分开成两边,让出了空间。巴利
391.Oramiya okāsamakāsīti vegena uṭṭhāya dvidhā bhijjitvā okāsamakāsi.
“为我所造”就是指由我所做。“以类似女人的名字称呼”是说,那是个女性名词的名字,因此应该用它来称呼,也就是应当用女性名词来称说。这是出于对用语习惯的善巧才这么说。“广舌”就是舌头宽大。“伸出来”就是把那舌头伸出来。巴利
Ye meti ye mayā. Nārīsamānasavhayāti nārīsamānanāmaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ, tena avhātabbāti nārīsamānasavhayā, itthiliṅgena vattabbāti vohārakusalatāya evaṃ vadati. Pahūtajivhoti puthulajivho. Ninnāmayetanti nīhara etaṃ.
393 具足一切功德者。巴利
393.Kevalīti sakalaguṇasampanno.
394 回答:当八个问题被一口气问出来时,他一一作了解答。知者:他能知能了,他的宿命住已经清清楚楚。又见天界和恶趣:这是说天眼智。达到生的尽灭:证得阿拉汉果。以胜知而究竟:证知阿拉汉果之后达到究竟,到达最终终点。牟尼:具足阿拉汉智之牟尼。巴利
394.Paccabhāsīti ekappahārena pucchite aṭṭha pañhe byākaronto patiabhāsi. Yo vedīti yo vidati jānāti, yassa pubbenivāso pākaṭo. Saggāpāyañca passatīti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Jātikkhayaṃpattoti arahattaṃ patto. Abhiññā vositoti taṃ arahattaṃ abhijānitvā vosito vosānappatto. Munīti arahattañāṇamoneyyena samannāgato.
清净,就是洁白。从贪欲中解脱,就是从烦恼贪中解脱。已断除生与死,是因为已经到达生的尽头,所以是已断生的人;正因为断了生,也就断了死。梵行的完全者,是指具足梵行的完整圆满,也就是圆满具备四道梵行而安住,意思是圆满住于四道梵行。于一切法到彼岸,是以证智到达一切世间法和出世间法的彼岸,意思是了知一切法之后安住。或者,“到彼岸”在这里有这样的含义:对五蕴是遍知到彼岸,对一切烦恼是断除到彼岸,对四道是修习到彼岸,对灭是作证到彼岸,对一切定是等至到彼岸。再者,“一切法”这一句,是说明以证智到彼岸。佛陀,如是称为:像这样以六种方式到达彼岸,并在一切方面觉悟四谛,所以称为佛陀。巴利
Visuddhanti paṇḍaraṃ. Muttaṃ rāgehīti kilesarāgehi muttaṃ. Pahīnajātimaraṇoti jātikkhayappattattā pahīnajātiko, jātipahāneneva pahīnamaraṇo. Brahmacariyassa kevalīti yaṃ brahmacariyassa kevalī sakalabhāvo, tena samannāgato, sakalacatumaggabrahmacariyavāsoti attho. Pāragū sabbadhammānanti sabbesaṃ lokiyalokuttaradhammānaṃ abhiññāya pāraṃ gato, sabbadhamme abhijānitvā ṭhitoti attho. Pāragūti vā ettāvatā pariññāpāragū pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ, pahānapāragū sabbakilesānaṃ , bhāvanāpāragū catunnaṃ maggānaṃ, sacchikiriyāpāragū nirodhassa, samāpattipāragū sabbasamāpattīnanti ayamattho vutto. Puna sabbadhammānanti iminā abhiññāpāragū vuttoti. Buddho tādī pavuccatīti tādiso chahi ākārehi pāraṃ gato sabbākārena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ buddhattā buddhoti pavuccatīti.
那么,到这里所有问题都回答完了吗?是的,都回答完了。靠“心清净,了知,从诸贪解脱”这一句,因为已经舍断了罪恶,所以称为婆罗门,第一个问题就回答完了。靠“度彼岸”这一句,因为已经通达诸吠陀,所以称为明吠陀者,第二个问题就回答完了。靠“宿住……”等句,因为具备这三种明,所以称为三明者,第三个问题就回答完了。靠“从一切贪解脱”这一句,因为由此从诸恶法出离,所以称为多闻者,第四个问题就回答完了。靠“达到生尽”这一句,因为这正是在说阿拉汉果,第五个问题就回答完了。靠“已完成”和“梵行之究竟者”这些句子,第六个问题就回答完了。靠“以证智究竟者,牟尼”这一句,第七个问题就回答完了。靠“度一切法之彼岸,被称为佛陀、如是者”这一句,第八个问题就回答完了。巴利
Kiṃ pana ettāvatā sabbe pañhā vissajjitā hontīti? Āma vissajjitā, cittaṃ visuddhaṃ jānāti, muttaṃ rāgehīti iminā tāva bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇoti paṭhamapañho vissajjito hoti. Pāragūti iminā vedehi gatattā vedagūti dutiyapañho vissajjito hoti. Pubbenivāsantiādīhi imāsaṃ tissannaṃ vijjānaṃ atthitāya tevijjoti tatiyapañho vissajjito hoti. Muttaṃ rāgehi sabbasoti imināva nissaṭattā pāpadhammānaṃ sottiyoti catutthapañho vissajjito hoti. Jātikkhayaṃ pattoti iminā pana arahattasseva vuttattā pañcamapañho vissajjito hoti. Vositoti ca brahmacariyassa kevalīti ca imehi chaṭṭhapañho vissajjito hoti. Abhiññā vosito munīti iminā sattamapañho vissajjito hoti. Pāragū sabbadhammānaṃ, buddho tādī pavuccatīti iminā aṭṭhamapañho vissajjito hoti.
395 “布施论”等部分,在下面的经里已经详细讲过了。“他实行”就是他去实践。“法随法”:在这部经里,“法”指的是阿拉汉道,“随法”指的是下面那三道和三种沙门果,意思是依次证得它们。“他并没有因为法而使我疲惫”,就是说没有因为法的缘故让我劳累,没有反复让我讲述。其余部分在各处都很清楚。而“般涅槃者”这个词,说明这次说法是以阿拉汉果为顶点的。巴利
395.Dānakathantiādīni heṭṭhā sutte vitthāritāneva. Paccapādīti paṭipajji. Dhammassānudhammanti imasmiṃ sutte dhammo nāma arahattamaggo, anudhammo nāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā tīṇi ca sāmaññaphalāni, tāni paṭipāṭiyā paṭilabhīti attho. Na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesesīti mañca dhammakāraṇā na kilamesi, na punappunaṃ kathāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Tattha parinibbāyīti pana padena desanāya arahatteneva kūṭaṃ gahitanti.
2. 塞拉经的注释巴利
2. Selasuttavaṇṇanā
396 如是我闻,这句说的是《塞拉经》。其中“在鸯古答拉人……”等话,在《波德离亚经》里已经详细讲过了。“以半十三”是指以十二又二分之一,也就是与一千二百五十位比丘一起,这样说。那些比丘是在声闻集会时聚集的,全都是通过“善来,比丘”的方式出家、诸漏已尽的人。给尼亚是他的名字,他是个结发苦行者。据说他本是婆罗门大富豪,为了保住财产才接受了苦行出家,他给国王献礼,得到一块地,在那里建了修行处住下来,用五百辆车经营商业,成为一千户人家的依靠,而且在他的修行处还有一棵棕榈树,每天都会掉下一颗金棕榈果,人们这样说。他白天穿袈裟、结发髻,夜里享受欲乐。“以法谈”是指与饮品功德相关的法谈。这位给尼亚空着手去见世尊觉得羞愧,心想“即使对戒除非时食者,饮品也是许可的”,于是让人准备了五百挑精心调制的枣子饮品,然后前往。他到了之后的情形,在《药犍度》(大品300)的巴利原文中已经记载:“那时,结发苦行者给尼亚这样想:我该让人给沙门乔达摩送些什么呢?”巴利
396.Evaṃme sutanti selasuttaṃ. Tattha aṅguttarāpesūtiādi potaliyasutte vitthāritameva. Aḍḍhateḷasehīti aḍḍhena teḷasehi, dvādasahi satehi paññāsāya ca bhikkhūhi saddhinti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pana sāvakasannipāte sannipatitā bhikkhūyeva sabbe ehibhikkhupabbajjāya pabbajitā khīṇāsavā. Keṇiyoti tassa nāmaṃ, jaṭiloti tāpaso. So kira brāhmaṇamahāsālo, dhanarakkhaṇatthāya pana tāpasapabbajjaṃ samādāya rañño paṇṇākāraṃ datvā bhūmibhāgaṃ gahetvā tattha assamaṃ kāretvā vasati pañcahi sakaṭasatehi vaṇijjaṃ payojetvā kulasahassassa nissayo hutvā, assamepi cassa eko tālarukkho divase divase ekaṃ sovaṇṇamayaṃ tālaphalaṃ muñcatīti vadanti. So divā kāsāyāni dhāreti, jaṭā ca bandhati, rattiṃ kāmasampattiṃ anubhavati. Dhammiyā kathāyāti pānakānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya. Ayañhi keṇiyo tucchahattho bhagavato dassanāya gantuṃ lajjāyamāno – ‘‘vikālabhojanā viratānampi pānakaṃ kappatī’’ti cintetvā susaṅkhatabadarapānaṃ pañcahi kājasatehi gāhāpetvā agamāsi. Evaṃ gatabhāvo cassa – ‘‘atha kho keṇiyassa jaṭilassa etadahosi kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa harāpeyya’’nti bhesajjakkhandhake (mahāva. 300) pāḷiāruḷhoyeva.
世尊第二次也拒绝了。为什么他要一再拒绝呢?是为了让外道对拒绝这件事生起净信吗?这不是原因。诸佛不会因为供养的因缘而做出这样欺诳的事。世尊看到这一千二百五十位比丘,心想:他只会为这些比丘准备食物,而明天这位塞拉将会带着三百人出家。可是,把新出家的比丘打发到别处去,只跟原来这些人一起去,或者把原来这些人打发到别处去,只跟新出家的比丘一起去,都不合适。但如果我把所有人都带去,乞食就不够了。到那时比丘们去乞食,人们就会抱怨:过了这么久,给尼亚邀请了沙门乔达摩,却连维持生活的食物都拿不出来。他自己也会后悔。可是如果拒绝了,他就会想:沙门乔达摩一再提到你净信婆罗门,提到婆罗门的名字。于是他就会想去邀请婆罗门。然后他会另外邀请婆罗门,那些婆罗门受他邀请后,就会作为比丘用餐。这样他的信心就得到了保护。所以世尊一再拒绝。他用“尽管,尊者”这句话表达的是:乔达摩尊者啊,就算我净信婆罗门,那又怎样呢?请尊者接受吧,我也能供养婆罗门们和你们。巴利
Dutiyampi kho bhagavāti kasmā punappunaṃ paṭikkhipi? Titthiyānaṃ paṭikkhepapasannatāya, akāraṇametaṃ, natthi buddhānaṃ paccayahetu evarūpaṃ kohaññaṃ. Ayaṃ pana aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni disvā ettakānaṃyeva bhikkhaṃ paṭiyādessati, sveva selo tīhi purisasatehi saddhiṃ pabbajissati. Ayuttaṃ kho pana navake aññato pesetvā imeheva saddhiṃ gantuṃ, ime vā aññato pesetvā navakehi saddhiṃ gantuṃ. Athāpi sabbe gahetvā gamissāmi, bhikkhāhāro nappahossati. Tato bhikkhūsu piṇḍāya carantesu manussā ujjhāyissanti – ‘‘cirassāpi keṇiyo samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ nimantetvā yāpanamattaṃ dātuṃ nāsakkhī’’ti, sayampi vippaṭisārī bhavissati. Paṭikkhepe pana kate ‘‘samaṇo gotamo punappunaṃ ‘tvañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno’ti brāhmaṇānaṃ nāmaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti cintetvā brāhmaṇepi nimantetukāmo bhavissati, tato brāhmaṇe pāṭiyekkaṃ nimantessati , te tena nimantitā bhikkhū hutvā bhuñjissanti. Evamassa saddhā anurakkhitā bhavissatīti punappunaṃ paṭikkhipi. Kiñcāpi kho, bhoti iminā idaṃ dīpeti, – ‘‘bho gotama, kiṃ jātaṃ yadi ahaṃ brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno, adhivāsetu bhavaṃ gotamo, ahaṃ brāhmaṇānampi dātuṃ sakkomi tumhākampī’’ti.
身体服务,就是指身体上的服侍。圆堂,就是用布搭的帐幕。巴利
Kāyaveyyāvaṭikanti kāyaveyyāvaccaṃ. Maṇḍalamāḷanti dussamaṇḍapaṃ.
397 “迎”是指娶新娘。“送”是指嫁女儿。“他是我邀请的”意思是:他是我所邀请的人。那时,这位婆罗门因为亲依止缘已经成熟,一听到“佛陀”这个词,就像被甘露灌顶一样,生起了净信,便问道:“给尼亚贤者,你说的是‘佛陀’吗?”给尼亚如实告诉他:“谢喇贤者,我说的是‘佛陀’。”接着,为了让他更加坚定,又问了一遍,他也同样作了回答。巴利
397.Āvāhoti kaññāgahaṇaṃ. Vivāhoti kaññādānaṃ. So me nimantitoti so mayā nimantito. Atha brāhmaṇo paripakkopanissayattā buddhasaddaṃ sutvāva amatenevābhisitto pasādaṃ āvikaronto buddhoti, bho keṇiya, vadesīti āha. Keṇiyo yathābhūtaṃ ācikkhanto buddhoti, bho sela, vadāmīti āha. Tato naṃ punapi daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ pucchi, itaropi tatheva ārocesi.
398 398. 他观察到,即使经过百千劫,光是“佛陀”这个词都极难听到。他心里这样想,于是就有了“音声也……”这一段话。“深蓝林带”指的是深蓝色的树列。“步中的步”是说一步的距离。因为把脚踏得太近或太远都会发出声音,为了阻止这种情况,才这样说。“如狮子独行”:群居的狮子跟幼狮等在一起时会懈怠,独行的狮子则不懈怠。就这样,他用独行狮子来打比方,说明应当以不放逸而住。“诸贤友,请不要……”他是在教导行为规范。这里的意思是:如果你们没有得到说话的机会,就在我说话中间插话,别人就会指责我:“他没能教好弟子。”所以应该看准时机再说话。“然而我不知道”:维巴斯菩萨被八万四千位出家长老比丘围绕,行了七个月的菩萨行,那时就已经像佛陀出世一样了。我们的菩萨也是如此,行了六年的菩萨行。如此,即使具足圆满的身相特征,也不一定就是佛陀。因此那位婆罗门说:“然而我不知道。”巴利
398. Athassa kappasatasahassehipi buddhasaddasseva dullabhabhāvaṃ sampassato. Etadahosīti. Etaṃ ‘‘ghosopi kho’’tiādi ahosi. Nīlavanarājīti nīlavaṇṇarukkhapanti. Pade padanti padappamāṇe padaṃ. Accāsanne hi atidūre vā pāde nikkhipamāne saddo uṭṭhāti, taṃ paṭisedhento evamāha. Sīhāva ekacarāti gaṇavāsī sīho sīhapotakādīhi saddhiṃ pamādaṃ āpajjati, ekacaro appamatto hoti. Iti appamādavihāraṃ dassento ekacarasīhena opammaṃ karoti. Mā me bhontoti ācāraṃ sikkhāpento āha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sace tumhe kathāvāraṃ alabhitvā mama kathāya antare kathaṃ pavesessatha, ‘‘antevāsike sikkhāpetuṃ nāsakkhī’’ti mayhaṃ garahā uppajjissati, tasmā okāsaṃ passitvā manteyyāthāti. No ca kho naṃ jānāmīti vipassīpi bodhisatto caturāsītisahassattherapabbajitaparivāro satta māsāni bodhisattacārikaṃ cari, buddhuppādakālo viya ahosi. Amhākampi bodhisatto chabbassāni bodhisattacārikaṃ cari. Evaṃ paripuṇṇasarīralakkhaṇehi samannāgatāpi buddhā na honti. Tasmā brāhmaṇo ‘‘no ca kho naṃ jānāmī’’ti āha.
399 身体圆满,是指因为种种相好具足、没有残缺,所以身体圆满。好光,是指殊妙的身光。善生,是指因为高矮胖瘦都恰到好处、体态端正,所以生得美好。悦目,是指即使长久注视也不让人厌足、令人心生欢喜的容貌。金色,是指像黄金一样的颜色。白齿,是指牙齿非常洁白。大人相,是用不同的说法来总结前面所说的那些特征。巴利
399.Paripuṇṇakāyoti lakkhaṇehi paripuṇṇatāya ahīnaṅgatāya ca paripuṇṇasarīro. Surucīti sundarasarīrappabho. Sujātoti ārohapariṇāhasampattiyā saṇṭhānasampattiyā ca sunibbatto. Cārudassanoti sucirampi passantānaṃ atittijanako manoharadassano. Suvaṇṇavaṇṇoti suvaṇṇasadisavaṇṇo. Susukkadāṭhoti suṭṭhu sukkadāṭho. Mahāpurisalakkhaṇāti paṭhamaṃ vuttabyañjanāneva vacanantarena nigamento āha.
现在,他从这些相好中挑出自己心里最喜欢的部分来赞叹,于是说了“净眼”等话。世尊确实因为具足五种清净之色而拥有清净的眼睛,因为面容像满月一样而有好面容,因为身高和体围都恰到好处而显得高大,因为身体像梵天一样端正挺直而显得正直,因为具足光明而有大威德。至于这里前面已经说过的内容,是以“在沙门僧团中”这种方式来赞叹,所以又再说了一遍。正是像这样的人,才这样光芒四射。后面的偈颂也是同样的道理。“最上色者”是指具足最上色身的人。“车王”是指最上的调御者。“赡部洲林”是指赡部洲。以显赫的威德,他成为自在者。巴利
Idāni tesu lakkhaṇesu attano cittarucitāni gahetvā thomento pasannanettotiādimāha. Bhagavā hi pañcavaṇṇapasādasampattiyā pasannanetto, puṇṇacandasadisamukhatāya sumukho, ārohapariṇāhasampattiyā brahā, brahmujugattatāya uju, jutimantatāya patāpavā. Yampi cettha pubbe vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘majjhe samaṇasaṅghassā’’ti iminā pariyāyena thomayatā puna vuttaṃ. Ediso hi evaṃ virocati. Uttaragāthāyapi eseva nayo. Uttamavaṇṇīnoti uttamavaṇṇasampannassa. Rathesabhoti uttamasārathi. Jambusaṇḍassāti jambudīpassa. Pākaṭena issariyaṃ issaro hoti.
刹帝利是指出身于刹帝利种姓的人。富有者是指拥有财富的人。国王是指任何行使王权的人。王中王是指受到诸王敬奉的人,也就是成为大王,这里指的是转轮王。人主是指成为众人的主宰、最高的自在者。巴利
Khattiyāti jātikhattiyā. Bhogīti bhogiyā. Rājānoti ye keci rajjaṃ kārentā. Rājābhirājāti rājūnaṃ pūjanīyo, adhirājā hutvā, cakkavattīti adhippāyo. Manujindoti manussādhipati paramissaro hutvā.
世尊听塞拉这样说之后,为了满足塞拉的心愿——“那些阿拉汉、正自觉者,当自己的功德被宣说时,就会显现自身”——便说了“我是王”等话。这里的意思是:塞拉,你请求说“您堪当国王”,对此不必费心,我本身就是王。而且,说到王权,别的国王或许统治一百由旬或一千由旬的地方,即使成为转轮王也不过统治四洲之内,而我的领域并不是这样有限。我是无上的法王,纵向从最高的有顶天直到无间地狱,横向则统御无量的世界。凡是无足、二足等各类众生,我都是他们中最上的。在戒……乃至解脱知见方面,没有任何人能和我相比。我正是这样无上的法王,以无上的四念处等法门转动法轮。“舍弃这个,成就那个而安住”,这是教诫之轮;而“诸比丘,这是苦圣谛”等,则是以教理之法转动法轮。所谓轮不退转,意思是:在这个世间,无论沙门……还是任何人,都无法使这个轮退转。巴利
Evaṃ vutte bhagavā – ‘‘ye te bhavanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā, te sakavaṇṇe bhaññamāne attānaṃ pātukarontī’’ti imaṃ selassa manorathaṃ pūrento rājāhamasmītiādimāha. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yaṃ maṃ tvaṃ sela ‘‘rājā arahasi bhavitu’’nti yācasi, ettha appossukko hoti rājāhamasmi. Sati ca rājatte yathā añño rājā yojanasataṃ vā anusāsati yojanasahassaṃ vā, cakkavattī hutvāpi catudīpapariyantamattaṃ vā, nāhamevaṃ paricchinnavisayo, ahañhi dhammarājā anuttaro bhavaggato avīcipariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ appamāṇalokadhātuyo anusāsāmi. Yāvatā hi apadadvipadādibhedā sattā, ahaṃ tesaṃ aggo. Na hi me koci sīlena vā…pe… vimuttiñāṇadassanena vā paṭibhāgo atthi, svāhaṃ evaṃ dhammarājā anuttaro anuttareneva catusatipaṭṭhānādibhedena dhammena cakkaṃ vattemi. Idaṃ pajahatha, idaṃ upasampajja viharathāti āṇācakkaṃ, idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhaṃ ariyasaccantiādinā pariyattidhammena dhammacakkameva vā. Cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti yaṃ cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ hoti samaṇena vā…pe… kenaci vā lokasminti.
塞拉看见世尊这样显示自己,生起喜悦和欢欣,为了进一步确认,又说了两首偈颂:“正自觉者,您自称……”其中“那将军是谁”是在问:“尊贵的主人,您以法转动的法轮,随转法轮的将军是谁呢?”巴利
Evaṃ attānaṃ āvikarontaṃ bhagavantaṃ disvā pītisomanassajāto selo puna daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ sambuddho paṭijānāsīti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha ko nu senāpatīti rañño bhoto dhammena pavattitassa cakkassa anupavattako senāpati ko nūti pucchi.
当时,具寿舍利弗坐在世尊右边,像一堆黄金一样,以光彩而闪耀。世尊指着他,说出“由我所转”这首偈颂。其中,“随如来而生”是指以如来为因而生,也就是由如来这个因而出生。另外,还说了三种:劣生、随生、超生。其中,劣生是犯戒的人,他不算是如来的儿子;超生是指胜过父亲的人,这样的人也不是如来的儿子。如来只有随生这一种儿子。为了说明这一点,世尊这样说道。巴利
Tena ca samayena bhagavato dakkhiṇapasse āyasmā sāriputto nisinno hoti suvaṇṇapuñjo viya siriyā sobhamāno, taṃ dassento bhagavā mayā pavattitanti gāthamāha. Tattha anujāto tathāgatanti tathāgataṃ hetuṃ anujāto, tathāgatena hetunā jātoti attho. Apica avajāto anujāto atijātoti tayo vuttā. Tesu avajāto dussīlo, so tathāgatassa putto nāma na hoti. Atijāto nāma pitarā uttaritaro, tādisopi tathāgatassa putto natthi. Tathāgatassa pana eko anujātova putto hoti, taṃ dassento evamāha.
世尊这样回答了“谁是将军”这个问题之后,为了让塞拉对他所说的“您是正自觉者吗”这句话不再有疑惑,想要让他明白:“我不是只凭自称就自认是佛,而是因为有这个原因才成为佛陀”,于是说出“应证知”这首偈颂。其中,“应证知”指的是明与解脱。“应修习”指的是道圣谛。“应断除”指的是集圣谛。不过,因为是从因的角度来说的,从果的成就来看,它们的果——灭圣谛和苦圣谛——也已经被说到了。这样,“应作证的已作证,应遍知的已遍知”也包含在这里面了。为了显示四圣谛的修习之果与解脱,他说“应觉悟的已觉悟,我已成佛”,以合理的理由成立佛的境界。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘ko nu senāpatī’’ti pañhaṃ byākaritvā yaṃ selo āha ‘‘sambuddho paṭijānāsī’’ti, tatra naṃ nikkaṅkhaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘nāhaṃ paṭiññāmatteneva paṭijānāmi, apicāhaṃ iminā kāraṇena buddho’’ti ñāpetuṃ abhiññeyyanti gāthamāha. Tatra abhiññeyyanti vijjā ca vimutti ca. Bhāvetabbaṃ maggasaccaṃ. Pahātabbaṃ samudayasaccaṃ. Hetuvacanena pana phalasiddhito tesaṃ phalāni nirodhasaccadukkhasaccānipi vuttāneva honti. Evaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikataṃ pariññātabbaṃ pariññātanti idampettha saṅgahitanti catusaccabhāvanāphalañca vimuttiñca dassento ‘‘bujjhitabbaṃ bujjhitvā buddho jātosmī’’ti yuttahetunā buddhabhāvaṃ sādheti.
世尊这样毫无保留地显示了自己之后,为了去除婆罗门对自身的疑惑,对他进行调伏(令其随顺己意),说了“应调伏”这三首偈颂。其中,“拔箭者”是指拔除贪等箭矢的人。“无上”:就像外道医生治好的病,在这个生命体中还会再发作,但我所治好的病不是这样。我所治好的病,在来世也不会再生起,所以我是无上的,这就是“无上”的意思。“梵已立”是指成为最殊胜者。“无比”是指超越了衡量,无可比拟的意思。“摧伏魔军”:就是摧破“欲是你的第一支军队”等所说的魔军。“一切仇敌”:是指蕴、烦恼、行、死、天子魔等所说的一切怨敌。“降伏”:是指令其随顺自己的掌控。“无所畏惧”:是指从任何地方都无所畏惧。巴利
Evaṃ nippariyāyena attānaṃ āvikatvā attani kaṅkhāvitaraṇatthaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ aticāriyamāno vinayassūti gāthattayamāha. Tattha sallakattoti rāgādisallakantano. Anuttaroti yathā bāhiravejjena vūpasamitarogo imasmiññevattabhāve kuppati, na evaṃ. Mayā vūpasamitassa pana rogassa bhavantarepi uppatti natthi, tasmā ahaṃ anuttaroti attho. Brahmabhūtoti seṭṭhabhūto. Atituloti tulaṃ atīto, nirupamoti attho. Mārasenappamaddanoti kāmā te paṭhamā senāti evaṃ āgatāya mārasenāya pamaddano. Sabbāmitteti khandhakilesābhisaṅkhāramaccudevaputtamārasaṅkhāte sabbapaccatthike. Vasīkatvāti attano vase vattetvā. Akutobhayoti kutoci abhayo.
世尊这样说后,塞拉婆罗门立刻对世尊生起了净信,想要出家,便说了“这些贤者”等三首偈颂。其中,“黑生者”是指生于旃陀罗等低贱家族的人。接着,那些年轻人也想要出家,便说了“如果这样合您心意,贤者”这首偈颂。于是塞拉对那些年轻人心生欢喜,一边把他们指出来,一边请求出家,说了“婆罗门”这首偈颂。巴利
Evaṃ vutte selo brāhmaṇo tāvadeva bhagavati sañjātapasādo pabbajjāpekkho hutvā imaṃ bhontoti gāthattayamāha. Tattha kaṇhābhijātikoti caṇḍālādinīcakule jāto. Tato tepi māṇavakā pabbajjāpekkhā hutvā evañce ruccati, bhototi gāthamāhaṃsu. Atha selo tesu māṇavakesu tuṭṭhacitto te ca dassento pabbajjaṃ yācanto ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti gāthamāha.
那时,世尊因为塞拉在过去莲华上佛的教法时期,曾做那三百人的僧团首领,和他们一起建了精舍,做了布施等福德善行,凭这业报享受天界和人间的福报,在最后一生又投生为他们的老师;而且他们那业已经成熟,能带来解脱的成熟果报,也成为他们以“善来比丘”身份出家的助缘。因此,世尊让他们全都以“善来比丘”的方式出家,说了“善说”这首偈颂。其中,“现见”是指应当自己亲自见到的、眼前亲证的。“非时”是指由于道后立即生果,所证得的果报没有时间间隔。“于此非空”:在那道梵行中,精勤者通过圆满三学而修学,其出家决不会空无果报,即定有成果之义。这样说后,世尊说:“来吧,诸比丘。”他们全都持钵着衣,从空中而来,像百岁长老一样善加调伏,礼拜了世尊。如此,针对他们以“善来比丘”身份出家这件事,说了“塞拉确实得到”等语。巴利
Tato bhagavā yasmā selo atīte padumuttarassa bhagavato sāsane tesaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ purisasatānaṃ gaṇaseṭṭho hutvā tehi saddhiṃ pariveṇaṃ kāretvā dānādīni puññāni katvā tena kammena devamanussasampattiṃ anubhavamāno pacchime bhave tesaṃyeva ācariyo hutvā nibbatto, tañca tesaṃ kammaṃ vimuttiparipākāya paripakkaṃ ehibhikkhubhāvassa ca upanissayabhūtaṃ, tasmā te sabbeva ehibhikkhupabbajjaṃ pabbājento svākkhātanti gāthamāha. Tattha sandiṭṭhikanti sayameva daṭṭhabbaṃ paccakkhaṃ. Akālikanti maggānantaraphaluppattiyā na kālantaraṃ pattabbaphalaṃ. Yattha amoghāti yasmiṃ maggabrahmacariye appamattassa sikkhattayapūraṇena sikkhato pabbajjā amoghā hoti, saphalāti attho. Evañca vatvā ‘‘etha bhikkhavo’’ti bhagavā avoca. Te sabbe pattacīvaradharā hutvā ākāsenāgantvā vassasatikattherā viya suvinītā bhagavantaṃ abhivādayiṃsu. Evamimaṃ tesaṃ ehibhikkhubhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘alattha kho selo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
400 “以这些”就是指以这些让给尼亚心生欢喜的偈颂。其中,因为婆罗门一旦离开事火就没有祭祀可言,所以说“火供是祭祀之口”。意思是,火供最为殊胜,是以投火供养为主的祭祀。在讽诵吠陀时,萨维提赞歌因为是首先要诵的,所以被称为“韵文之口”。国王因为是人类中最尊贵的,所以被称为“口”。大海因为是诸河的归宿和依靠,所以被称为“口”。月亮因为与星宿相应,让人知道“今天是昴宿日,今天是罗希尼日”,又能带来光明,性情清凉,所以说“月亮是星宿之口”。太阳因为是一切发光者中最殊胜的,所以说“太阳是发光者之口”。然而,若就应受供养者中最殊胜的而言,则特别是指当时以佛为首的僧团,因此说:“对于希求福德的人,僧团正是祭祀之口。”由此说明:僧团是福德的入口。巴利
400.Imāhīti imāhi keṇiyassa cittānukūlāhi gāthāhi. Tattha aggiparicariyaṃ vinā brāhmaṇānaṃ yaññābhāvato ‘‘aggihuttamukhā yaññā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aggihuttaseṭṭhā aggijuhanappadhānāti attho. Vede sajjhāyantehi paṭhamaṃ sajjhāyitabbato, sāvittī, ‘‘chandaso mukha’’nti vutto. Manussānaṃ seṭṭhato rājā ‘‘mukha’’nti vutto. Nadīnaṃ ādhārato paṭisaraṇato ca sāgaro ‘‘mukha’’nti vutto. Candayogavasena ‘‘ajja kattikā ajja rohiṇī’’ti saññāṇato ālokakaraṇato sommabhāvato ca ‘‘nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando’’ti vuttaṃ. Tapantānaṃ aggattā ādicco ‘‘tapataṃ mukha’’nti vutto. Dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ pana aggattā visesena tasmiṃ samaye buddhappamukhaṃ saṅghaṃ sandhāya ‘‘puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānānaṃ, saṅgho eva yajataṃ mukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tena saṅgho puññassa āyamukhanti dasseti.
那皈依这句,是另一首解说义理的偈颂。它的意思是:因为具足五眼的具眼者世尊,我们从今天算起的第八天已来到你那皈依处,所以我们以自身在您的教法中,已被无上的调伏之法所调伏。啊!你那皈依的威力,真是不可思议!巴利
Yaṃ taṃ saraṇanti aññaṃ byākaraṇagāthamāha. Tassattho – pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā bhagavā yasmā mayaṃ ito aṭṭhame divase taṃ saraṇaṃ āgatamhā, tasmā attanā tava sāsane anuttarena damathena dantāmhā, aho te saraṇassa ānubhāvoti.
之后,三百位比丘用两首偈颂赞叹世尊,又用第三首偈颂请求顶礼,诵出“ime……”等语。巴利
Tato paraṃ bhagavantaṃ dvīhi gāthāhi thometvā tatiyāya vandanaṃ yācanto bhikkhavo tisatā imetiādimāhāti.
3.《阿萨喇亚经》的注释巴利
3. Assalāyanasuttavaṇṇanā
401 “如是我闻”这句,说的就是《阿萨喇亚经》。其中“来自种种异地之人”,是指从鸯伽、摩揭陀等各种不同外地来的人,也可以指在那些地方出生、长大的人。“以某一种事务”是指没有限定为祭祀、侍奉等特定事务。“四种种姓”是指四种姓共通的事。然而他们这样想:“我们婆罗门是靠沐浴清净、修行清净也才清净的,只有婆罗门才清净;沙门乔达摩却做了不该做的事。”“剃了头的人”就是剃除头发的人。巴利
401.Evaṃme sutanti assalāyanasuttaṃ. Tattha nānāverajjakānanti aṅgamagadhādīhi nānappakārehi verajjehi āgatānaṃ, tesu vā raṭṭhesu jātasaṃvaḍḍhānantipi attho. Kenacidevāti yaññupāsanādinā aniyamitakiccena. Cātuvaṇṇinti catuvaṇṇasādhāraṇaṃ. Mayaṃ pana nhānasuddhiyā bhāvanāsuddhiyāpi brāhmaṇāva sujjhantīti vadāma, ayuttampi samaṇo gotamo karotīti maññamānā evaṃ cintayiṃsu. Vuttasiroti vāpitasiro.
“说法者”就是主张事物真实本性的人。“难以反驳”是说,像我们这些主张非法的人,很难跟他们辩驳。这是在表明:主张正法的人不可能被击败。“游方者”是一种出家方式:他们学完三部吠陀之后,最后才出家;他们靠某些咒语出家,出家后又持诵那些咒语,或者奉行某种修行规范。贤者,这一切您都实践过、学过了。所以他们想:您不可能落败,只会获胜,于是说出了这番话。巴利
Dhammavādīti sabhāvavādī. Duppaṭimantiyāti amhādisehi adhammavādīhi dukkhena paṭimantitabbā honti. Dhammavādino nāma parājayo na sakkā kātunti dasseti. Paribbājakanti pabbajjāvidhānaṃ, tayo vede uggahetvā sabbapacchā pabbajantā yehi mantehi pabbajanti, pabbajitā ca ye mante pariharanti, yaṃ vā ācāraṃ ācaranti, taṃ sabbaṃ bhotā caritaṃ sikkhitaṃ. Tasmā tuyhaṃ parājayo natthi, jayova bhavissatīti maññantā evamāhaṃsu.
402 然而可见等这些话,是为了破除他们的邪见而说的。其中,婆罗门女是指为了给婆罗门生孩子传宗接代,通过迎娶嫁娶的方式从家族中娶来的婆罗门女子,她们是看得见的。而这些女子后来也会有经期,也就是月经来了。怀孕的就是已经怀了胎。正在生产的就是正在生儿育女。正在哺乳的就是正在给婴儿喂奶。同样是从产道生出来的——婆罗门自己同样是从婆罗门女的产道出生的,却这样说:婆罗门是最胜种姓……婆罗门是大梵天王的继承人。如果他们这话是真的,那么婆罗门女的肚子就该是大梵天王的胸膛,婆罗门女的产道就该是大梵天王的嘴。这样一来,我们住在大梵天王的胸膛里,从大梵天王的口中生出来这话就不得说了。这就是对从口而生这一说法的破斥。巴利
402.Dissanti kho panātiādi tesaṃ laddhibhindanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha brāhmaṇiyoti brāhmaṇānaṃ puttapaṭilābhatthāya āvāhavivāhavasena kulā ānītā brāhmaṇiyo dissanti . Tā kho panetā aparena samayena utuniyopi honti, sañjātapupphāti attho. Gabbhiniyoti sañjātagabbhā. Vijāyamānāti puttadhītaro janayamānā. Pāyamānāti dārake thaññaṃ pāyantiyo. Yonijāva samānāti brāhmaṇīnaṃ passāvamaggena jātā samānā. Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti. Kathaṃ? Brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo…pe… brahmadāyādāti. Yadi pana nesaṃ saccavacanaṃ siyā, brāhmaṇīnaṃ kucchi mahābrahmuno uro bhaveyya, brāhmaṇīnaṃ passāvamaggo mahābrahmuno mukhaṃ bhaveyya, ettāvatā ‘‘mayaṃ mahābrahmuno ure vasitvā mukhato nikkhantā’’ti vattuṃ mā labhantūti ayaṃ mukhato jātacchedakavādo vutto.
403 “主人变成奴仆,奴仆变成主人。”——比如说,有个婆罗门带着妻子去做买卖,到了臾那迦国或者剑浮阇国,就在那里死了。他家里要是没有成年的儿子,这个婆罗门女就跟奴仆或者雇工住在一起。一旦生下个男孩,那个男人仍然是奴仆,可跟他生的这个男孩却成了继承家产的主人。这样一来,从母亲这边算,血统是干净的;从父亲这边算,血统就不干净了。这孩子长大后也去做买卖,到了中部地方,娶了一个婆罗门少女,在她肚子里怀上了孩子。这个孩子同样是从母亲这边算干净,从父亲这边算不干净。说这些,就是为了说明:即使在婆罗门自己的说法里,种姓的混杂也是存在的。“什么力量?什么依靠?”意思是说:在你们那里,当奴仆的时候全都是奴仆,当主人的时候全都是主人。你们凭什么本事、靠什么支撑,敢说只有婆罗门才是最上等的种姓呢?巴利
403.Ayyo hutvā dāso hoti, dāso hutvā ayyo hotīti brāhmaṇo sabhariyo vaṇijjaṃ payojento yonakaraṭṭhaṃ vā kambojaraṭṭhaṃ vā gantvā kālaṃ karoti, tassa gehe vayappatte putte asati brāhmaṇī dāsena vā kammakarena vā saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappeti. Ekasmiṃ dārake jāte so puriso dāsova hoti, tassa jātadārako pana dāyajjasāmiko hoti. Mātito suddho pitito asuddho so vaṇijjaṃ payojento majjhimapadesaṃ gantvā brāhmaṇadārikaṃ gahetvā tassā kucchismiṃ puttaṃ paṭilabhati, sopi mātitova suddho hoti pitito asuddho. Evaṃ brāhmaṇasamayasmiññeva jātisambhedo hotīti dassanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiṃbalaṃ, ko assāsoti yattha tumhe dāsā hontā sabbeva dāsā hotha, ayyā hontā sabbeva ayyā hotha, ettha vo ko thāmo, ko avassayo, yaṃ brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇoti vadathāti dīpeti.
404 像“刹帝利究竟……”这类说法,就叫作断章取义的论调。巴利
404.Khattiyova nu khotiādayo suttacchedakavādā nāma honti.
408 现在,为了说明四种姓的清净,经文接着说了“在这里,国王……”等话。“狗饮水槽”就是狗喝水的水槽。“火事”是指驱寒、除暗、煮饭等用火来做的事情。这里的“阿娑罗延那”,就是指做这一切火事的人。巴利
408. Idāni cātuvaṇṇisuddhiṃ dassento idha rājātiādimāha. Sāpānadoṇiyāti sunakhānaṃ pivanadoṇiyā. Aggikaraṇīyanti sītavinodanaandhakāravidhamanabhattapacanādi aggikiccaṃ. Ettha assalāyanāti ettha sabbasmiṃ aggikiccaṃ karonte.
409 现在,婆罗门们说“四姓清净”,但在这里,“四姓”并没有限定。因为实际上还存在第五种贱民阶层。为了简要指出他们这种说法的过失,经文在这里说了“刹帝利青年”等话。其中,“在那里和别处,对于这些人”的意思是:在先前那个论例中,这些年轻人的差别我一点也看不出来——他这样说。然而差别确实是存在的。刹帝利青年和婆罗门少女所生的人,叫做“刹帝利贱种”;另一方则叫做“婆罗门贱种”。这些人都是出身低贱的青年。巴利
409. Idāni yadetaṃ brāhmaṇā cātuvaṇṇisuddhīti vadanti, ettha cātuvaṇṇāti niyamo natthi. Pañcamo hi pādasikavaṇṇopi atthīti saṃkhittena tesaṃ vāde dosadassanatthaṃ idha khattiyakumārotiādimāha. Tatra amutra ca panesānanti amusmiñca pana purimanaye etesaṃ māṇavakānaṃ kiñci nānākaraṇaṃ na passāmīti vadati. Nānākaraṇaṃ pana tesampi atthiyeva. Khattiyakumārassa hi brāhmaṇakaññāya uppanno khattiyapādasiko nāma, itaro brāhmaṇapādasiko nāma, ete hīnajātimāṇavakā.
像这样,先指出他们“四姓清净”的说法有过失,因为还存在第五种姓;现在为了进一步教诫四姓清净的问题,就说了“你认为怎么样”等话。其中,“以净信”是指为亡者备办的饭食;“以满盘食”是指作为礼物的饭食;“以祭祀”是指祭祀时的饭食;“以待客”是指为来客备办的饭食。“什么利益”是在说明:这会有大果报呢,还是没有呢?巴利
Evaṃ pañcamassa vaṇṇassa atthitāya cātuvaṇṇisuddhīti etesaṃ vāde dosaṃ dassetvā idāni puna cātuvaṇṇisuddhiyaṃ ovadanto taṃ kiṃ maññasītiādimāha. Tattha saddheti matakabhatte. Thālipāketi paṇṇākārabhatte. Yaññeti yaññabhatte. Pāhuneti āgantukānaṃ katabhatte. Kiṃ hīti kiṃ mahapphalaṃ bhavissati, no bhavissatīti dīpeti.
410 阿萨喇亚,从前当我出身更低贱、你们更尊贵时,你们被我以出身论问难,都没能答得上来;如今你们出身更加低贱,而我是诸佛中最殊胜的,被我问到同样的出身论问题,你们又怎么能答得上来呢?不必在这里犹豫——为了鼓励这位年轻人,世尊开始了这段开示。其中,“阿斯达”就是“黑色的”意思;“德瓦罗”是他的名字,他正是当时的世尊。“波咤利”指牛群涉水的渡口;“波坦迪勒”指叶寺的僧房。“是谁?究竟在哪里?”意思是像村童一样无知。“而我就是,贤者们”意思是他这样说:“贤者们,我就是阿斯达·德瓦罗。”据说那时大菩萨化身为恭达达摩,正在游化。“他们开始礼拜”意思是他们开始行礼致敬。从那时起,即使是修了百年苦行的沙门,如果不向当天出生的婆罗门男孩敬礼,就成了有过失的人。巴利
410.Bhūtapubbanti assalāyana pubbe mayi jātiyā hīnatare tumhe seṭṭhatarā samānāpi mayā jātivāde pañhaṃ puṭṭhā sampādetuṃ na sakkhittha, idāni tumhe hīnatarā hutvā mayā seṭṭhatarena buddhānaṃ sake jātivādapañhaṃ puṭṭhā kiṃ sampādessatha? Na ettha cintā kātabbāti māṇavaṃ upatthambhento imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha asitoti kāḷako. Devaloti tassa nāmaṃ, ayameva bhagavā tena samayena. Paṭaliyoti gaṇaṅgaṇupāhanā. Patthaṇḍileti paṇṇasālapariveṇe. Ko nu khoti kahaṃ nu kho. Gāmaṇḍalarūpo viyāti gāmadārakarūpo viya. So khvāhaṃ, bho, homīti so ahaṃ, bho, asitadevalo homīti vadati. Tadā kira mahāsatto koṇḍadamako hutvā vicarati. Abhivādetuṃ upakkamiṃsūti vandituṃ upakkamaṃ akaṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya ca vassasatikatāpasopi tadahujātaṃ brāhmaṇakumāraṃ avandanto koṇḍito hoti.
411 “生母”就是生下你们的母亲,她是你们的生母。“生母的母亲”就是生母的妈妈。“生父”就是生育你们的父亲。也有一种读法是“生父就是父亲”。巴利
411.Janikā mātāti yāya tumhe janitā, sā vo janikā mātā. Janikāmātūti janikāya mātu. Yo janakoti yo janako pitā. ‘‘Yo janiko pitāteva’’ vā pāṭho.
被阿斯达(Asita)问到的意思是:被那位名叫迭瓦拉(Devala)、具足五神通的阿斯达仙人问起这乾闼婆问题时,他们没法圆满回答。“那些”指的是那七位仙人。“斟斗者普那并非”——那七位仙人中,有一位施主名叫普那,他拿起勺子,把叶子煮好布施给人,而且懂得拿勺子的手艺。你连你的老师一起算上,也比不上那位普那,所以看得出来,你连拿勺子这点手艺都不懂。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
Asitenāti pañcābhiññena asitena devalena isinā imaṃ gandhabbapañhaṃ puṭṭhā na sampāyissanti. Yesanti yesaṃ sattannaṃ isīnaṃ. Na puṇṇo dabbigāhoti tesaṃ sattannaṃ isīnaṃ dabbiṃ gahetvā paṇṇaṃ pacitvā dāyako puṇṇo nāma eko ahosi, so dabbigahaṇasippaṃ jānāti. Tvaṃ sācariyako tesaṃ puṇṇopi na hoti, tena ñātaṃ dabbigahaṇasippamattampi na jānāsīti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
这位阿萨喇亚却是有信仰、有净信的,他在自己的住处里面建了一座塔庙。从此以后,阿萨喇亚家族中出生的人,建好住宅后,都会在住处里面建塔庙。巴利
Ayaṃ pana assalāyano saddho ahosi pasanno, attano antonivesaneyeva cetiyaṃ kāresi. Yāvajjadivasā assalāyanavaṃse jātā nivesanaṃ kāretvā antonivesane cetiyaṃ karontevāti.
4. 《瞿哆牟佉经》的注释巴利
4. Ghoṭamukhasuttavaṇṇanā
412 “如是我闻”等语,是《瞿哆牟佉经》。其中,“在安稳芒果园”就是在一座名叫安稳的芒果园里。“如法的游行者”意思是如法的出家。“没有见过”是指没有见过像您这样的智者,或者是指没有见过这里所说的法、这里的真实情况。通过这句话表明:“我们的话不算标准,法才是标准。”于是上座心想:“在这里应该像在新伍波萨他堂一样,有很多事情要做。”就从经行处下来,走进叶屋坐下。为了说明这件事,才说了“如是我闻”等开篇的话。巴利
412.Evaṃme sutanti ghoṭamukhasuttaṃ. Tattha khemiyambavaneti evaṃnāmake ambavane. Dhammiko paribbajoti dhammikā pabbajjā. Adassanāti tumhādisānaṃ vā paṇḍitānaṃ adassanena. Yo vā panettha dhammoti yo vā pana ettha dhammo sabhāvo, tasseva vā adassanena. Iminā ‘‘amhākaṃ kathā appamāṇaṃ, dhammova pamāṇa’’nti dasseti. Tato thero ‘‘navauposathāgāre viya bahunā kammena idha bhavitabba’’nti cintetvā caṅkamā oruyha paṇṇasālaṃ pavisitvā nisīdi. Taṃ dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttetiādi vuttaṃ.
413 “有四种婆罗门”——据说,上座当时这样想:“这位婆罗门说:‘依止如法出家而成为沙门或婆罗门的人,并不存在。’我要给他指出四种人和两类众,然后问他:‘你常看到第四种人大多在哪一类众中?’他若明白,就会说:‘在出家众中。’这样,我就能让他亲口说出:‘如法的游行者是存在的。’”于是便开始了这段开示。巴利
413.Cattārome brāhmaṇāti therassa kira etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo ‘dhammikaṃ pabbajjaṃ upagato samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā natthī’ti vadati. Imassa cattāro puggale dve ca parisā dassetvā ‘catutthaṃ puggalaṃ katarāya parisāya bahulaṃ passasī’ti pucchissāmi, jānamāno ‘anāgāriyaparisāya’nti vakkhati. Evametaṃ sakamukheneva ‘dhammiko paribbajo atthī’ti vadāpessāmī’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.
414 其中,极为贪染就是深深贪染。所说的话有根据,就是所说的话有理由。我也这样说过:我们的话不算标准,法才是标准。巴利
414. Tattha sārattarattāti suṭṭhu rattarattā. Sānuggahā vācā bhāsitā sakāraṇā vācā bhāsitā. Vuttañhetaṃ mayā ‘‘amhākaṃ kathā appamāṇaṃ, dhammova pamāṇa’’nti.
421 “那么他们呢?”——为了分辨在家人会不会也说如法或不如法的话,他问了这个问题。“令造”:就是令建造。他令建造之后,命终投生到了天界。据说,懂得这种(暗杀)技艺的人,会杀掉母亲、父亲,然后杀掉自己。懂得这种技艺的人当中,除了他以外,没有谁投生到天界。而这个人依靠长老修了福德,才投生到那里。投生之后,他思惟:“我是因为什么业才投生到这里的?”如实了知之后,有一天,为了修缮破旧的食堂,僧团集会时,他以人的形貌前来问道:“尊者,僧团为什么集会?”
“为了修缮食堂。”
“这食堂是谁让人建的?”
“是瞿哆牟佉建的。”
“他现在在哪里?”
“已经命终了。”
“他有亲属吗?”
“有一个姐姐。”
“把她叫来。”比丘们就把她叫来了。他走到她面前说:“我是你的兄弟,名叫瞿哆牟佉。我建了这座食堂后投生到了天界。我在某某地方存有财物,你去取来,用这些继续建这座食堂,也抚养孩子们。”说完,他顶礼比丘僧团,腾空而起,径直回到了天界。其余各处内容都容易理解。巴利
421.Kiṃ pana teti gihi nāma kappiyampi akappiyampi vadeyyāti vivecanatthaṃ pucchi. Kārāpesīti māpesi. Kārāpetvā ca pana kālaṃ katvā sagge nibbatto. Etassa kira jānanasippe mātarampi pitarampi ghātetvā attāva ghātetabboti āgacchati. Etaṃ sippaṃ jānanto ṭhapetvā etaṃ añño sagge nibbatto nāma natthi, esa pana theraṃ upanissāya puññaṃ katvā tattha nibbattitvā ca pana ‘‘kenāhaṃ kammena idha nibbatto’’ti āvajjetvā yathābhūtaṃ ñatvā ekadivasaṃ jiṇṇāya bhojanasālāya paṭisaṅkharaṇatthaṃ saṅghe sannipatite manussavesena āgantvā pucchi – ‘‘kimatthaṃ, bhante, saṅgho sannipatito’’ti? Bhojanasālāya paṭisaṅkharaṇatthanti. Kenesā kāritāti? Ghoṭamukhenāti. Idāni so kuhinti? Kālaṅkatoti. Atthi panassa koci ñātakoti? Atthi ekā bhaginīti. Pakkosāpetha nanti. Bhikkhū pakkosāpesuṃ. So taṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘ahaṃ, tava bhātā, ghoṭamukho nāma imaṃ sālaṃ kāretvā sagge nibbatto, asuke ca asuke ca ṭhāne mayā ṭhapitaṃ dhanaṃ atthi, taṃ gahetvā imañca bhojanasālaṃ kārehi, dārake ca posehī’’ti vatvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vanditvā vehāsaṃ uppatitvā devalokameva agamāsi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《参吉经》注释巴利
5. Caṅkīsuttavaṇṇanā
422 422.“如是我闻”等,就是《参吉经》。其中,“天林沙罗树林”:据说在那个地方,人们为天神举行祭祀,所以那个林子既叫天林,也叫沙罗树林。“住在欧帕萨达”:意思是住在名叫欧帕萨达的婆罗门村里;或者也可以理解为征服之后住在那里,也就是成为那里的主人,按照应当居住的界限住在那里。不过在这里,由于前缀的关系,应当把业格理解为表示“在……地方”的处格义,因为其余词也没有业格的用法。这一点应当从语法学中去寻找依据。“众生充溢”:意思是众生充满、拥挤,人口众多、人烟稠密,到处挤满了人、象、马、孔雀、鹿等需饲养的各种众生。又因为那个村子外面蔓延生长着供象马等吃的草料,又有盖屋顶用的茅草,木材和建房用的木料也很充足;再加上村子里面有许多圆形、方形等各种形状的池塘,外面还有许多点缀着水生花卉的湖泊,水总是满满的,所以经文说“有草、有木、有水”。巴利
422.Evaṃme sutanti caṅkīsuttaṃ. Tattha devavane sālavaneti tasmiṃ kira devatānaṃ balikammaṃ karīyati, tena taṃ devavanantipi sālavanantipi vuccati. Opāsādaṃ ajjhāvasatīti opāsādanāmake brāhmaṇagāme vasati, abhibhavitvā vā āvasati, tassa sāmī hutvā yāya mariyādāya tattha vasitabbaṃ, tāya mariyādāya vasati. Upasaggavasena panettha bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ, tathassa anuppayogattāva sesapadesu. Tattha lakkhaṇaṃ saddasatthato pariyesitabbaṃ. Sattussadanti sattehi ussadaṃ ussannaṃ, bahujanaṃ ākiṇṇamanussaṃ posāvaniyahatthiassamoramigādianekasattasamākiṇṇañcāti attho. Yasmā pana so gāmo bahi āvijjhitvā jātena hatthiassādīnaṃ ghāsatiṇena ceva gehacchadanatiṇena ca sampanno, tathā dārukaṭṭhehi ceva gehasambhārakaṭṭhehi ca, yasmā cassa abbhantare vaṭṭacaturassādisaṇṭhānā bahū pokkharaṇiyo, jalajakusumavicittāni ca bahi anekāni taḷākāni vā udakassa niccabharitāneva honti, tasmā satiṇakaṭṭhodakanti vuttaṃ.
与谷物一起,就是连同谷物一起,包括初熟谷物、后熟谷物等各种各样的大量谷物堆积,这就是这句话的意思。到这里为止,说的是:在那个村子里,婆罗门撑起白伞,像国王一样威风地住着,这就显示了他富足圆满的成就。从国王那里得到的享用之物,就是御赐的。如果有人问是谁给的,那就是憍萨罗国的波斯匿王给的。王所施,意思是属于国王的赠予,也就是遗产。梵施,意思是最殊胜的布施,也就是撑起白伞,以国王的身份来享用。或者也可以这样理解御赐的:在行使一切生杀大权、在山林渡口等处征收关税的时候,撑起白伞,以国王的身份来享用。其中,由憍萨罗国波斯匿王所赐的,就叫王所施。这里因为是由国王赐予的,所以叫王施物;而为了指明施主是国王,才说由憍萨罗国波斯匿王所赐。梵施,意思是最殊胜的布施,意思是像已经彻底给出、不再收回那样,完全舍弃、彻底放下的布施。巴利
Saha dhaññena sadhaññaṃ, pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇādibhedaṃ bahudhaññasannicayanti attho. Ettāvatā yasmiṃ gāme brāhmaṇo setacchattaṃ ussāpetvā rājalīlāya vasati. Tassa samiddhisampatti dīpitā hoti. Rājato laddhaṃ bhoggaṃ rājabhoggaṃ. Kena dinnanti ce, raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṃ. Rājadāyanti rañño dāyabhūtaṃ, dāyajjanti attho. Brahmadeyyanti seṭṭhadeyyaṃ, chattaṃ ussāpetvā rājasaṅkhepena bhuñjitabbanti attho. Atha vā rājabhogganti sabbaṃ chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsantena titthapabbatādīsu suṅkaṃ gaṇhantena setacchattaṃ ussāpetvā raññā hutvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Tattha raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṃ rājadāyanti. Ettha raññā dinnattā rājadāyaṃ, dāyakarājadīpanatthaṃ panassa ‘‘raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinna’’nti idaṃ vuttaṃ. Brahmadeyyanti seṭṭhadeyyaṃ, yathā dinnaṃ na puna gahetabbaṃ hoti nissaṭṭhapariccattaṃ, evaṃ dinnanti attho.
423 423. “众多、众多地聚集在一起”,所以叫“众”。每一个方向都有他们的团体,所以叫“有团体的”。先前在村里不算数,出村之后团体圆满具足,所以叫“成为团体的”。“面朝北方”就是面向北方。“召唤家臣”:能回答所问问题的大臣叫“家臣”,他召唤了那位大臣。“请稍候吧”,意思是请稍等片刻,就是“请留下来”的意思。巴利
423. Bahū bahū hutvā saṃhatāti saṅghā. Ekekissā disāya saṅgho tesaṃ atthīti saṅghī. Pubbe gāmassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇā sampannāti gaṇībhūtā. Uttarenamukhāti uttaradisābhimukhā. Khattaṃ āmantesīti khattā vuccati pucchitapañhabyākaraṇasamattho mahāmatto, taṃ āmantesi. Āgamentūti muhuttaṃ paṭimānentu, acchantūti vuttaṃ hoti.
424 “种种异域之人”:指在迦尸、憍萨罗等各个不同的国土中出生、居住,或者从那些地方来的人,就叫“种种异域者”。“因某一事务”:指因为某件不确定的事情,比如祭祀、供养等。他们听说参吉要去那里,就心想:“这位参吉是出身高贵的婆罗门,而其他大多数婆罗门都已经皈依了沙门乔达摩,唯独他还没去。他要是去了那里,肯定会被沙门乔达摩那套引人上钩的幻术迷惑,从而皈依。这样一来,他家门口就不会再有婆罗门聚集了。来,我们想办法阻止他去。”他们这样商议之后,就去了那里。针对这件事,经文接着说“Atha kho te brāhmaṇā”等等。巴利
424.Nānāverajjakānanti nānāvidhesu rajjesu aññesu kāsikosalādīsu jātā vā nivasanti vā, tato vā āgatāti nānāverajjakā, tesaṃ nānāverajjakānaṃ. Kenacidevāti aniyamitena yaññupāsanādinā kenaci kiccena. Te tassa gamanaṃ sutvā cintesuṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ, caṅkī, uggatabrāhmaṇo, yebhuyyena ca aññe brāhmaṇā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā, ayameva na gato. Svāyaṃ sace tattha gamissati, addhā samaṇassa gotamassa āvaṭṭaniyā māyāya āvaṭṭito saraṇaṃ gamissati. Tato etassāpi gehadvāre brāhmaṇānaṃ asannipāto bhavissati. Handassa gamanantarāyaṃ karomā’’ti sammantayitvā tattha agamaṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘atha kho te brāhmaṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这里,“两方面”是指从母系和父系两个方向来说。从母亲这边和从父亲这边——尊者的母亲是婆罗门女,外祖母是婆罗门女,外祖母的母亲也是婆罗门女;父亲是婆罗门,祖父是婆罗门,祖父的父亲也是婆罗门。这样一来,尊者从母系和父系两方面都是“善生”。“清净受胎”的意思是:你母亲的受胎清净,你母亲的子宫清净。“上至第七代祖父辈”中,父亲的父亲就是祖父,祖父的一代叫祖父辈。“代”在这里指的是寿命的长度。这只是一种称呼,但从意义上说,祖父本身就是祖父辈。从此以上,所有先人都被祖父这一称呼所涵盖。如此,直到第七代人都保持清净受胎。或者说,这显示的是不被指责、不被以种姓之言贬斥。“不被指责”:即“除去此事,以此何用?”如此这般,不被指责、不被贬斥。“不被贬斥”:即不被贬斥,不曾遭受辱骂或谴责。以什么原因呢?以种姓之言,即“他是低贱种姓”这样的话,就是这个意思。以这个原因,即以此理由。巴利
Tattha ubhatoti dvīhi pakkhehi. Mātitoca pitito cāti, bhoto mātā brāhmaṇī, mātumātā brāhmaṇī, tassāpi mātā brāhmaṇī. Pitā brāhmaṇo, pitupitā brāhmaṇo, tassapi pitā brāhmaṇoti. Evaṃ bhavaṃ ubhato sujāto, mātito ca pitito ca. Saṃsuddhagahaṇikoti saṃsuddhā te mātu gahaṇī, saṃsuddhā te mātu kucchīti attho. Yāva sattamā pitāmahayugāti ettha pitu pitā pitāmaho, pitāmahassa yugaṃ pitāmahayugaṃ. Yuganti āyuppamāṇaṃ vuccati. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana pitāmahova pitāmahayugaṃ. Tato uddhaṃ sabbepi pubbapurisā pitāmahaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Evaṃ yāva sattamo puriso, tāva saṃsuddhagahaṇiko. Atha vā akkhitto anupakuṭṭho jātivādenāti dasseti. Akkhittoti apanetha etaṃ, kiṃ imināti evaṃ akkhitto anavakkhitto. Anupakkuṭṭhoti na upakuṭṭho, na akkosaṃ vā nindaṃ vā pattapubbo. Kena kāraṇenāti. Jātivādena, itipi hīnajātiko esoti evarūpena vacanenāti attho. Imināpaṅgenāti imināpi kāraṇena.
“Aḍḍho”就是有钱有势的。“Mahaddhano”就是拥有巨额财富。他们这样说,是想表明:在尊者家里,财富多得像地上的尘土,而沙门乔达摩却一无所有,靠乞食填饱肚子过日子。“Mahābhogo”就是大享福,凭五种欲乐而享有丰盛的受用。他们这样讲,是以为每赞叹自己一种优点,就能反衬出世尊没有那个优点。巴利
Aḍḍhoti issaro. Mahaddhanoti mahatā dhanena samannāgato. Bhoto hi gehe pathaviyaṃ paṃsuvālikā viya bahu dhanaṃ, samaṇo pana gotamo adhano bhikkhāya udaraṃ pūretvā yāpetīti dassenti . Mahābhogoti pañcakāmaguṇavasena mahāupabhogo. Evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ guṇaṃ vadanti, tassa tassa paṭipakkhavasena bhagavato aguṇaṃyeva dassemāti maññamānā vadanti.
容貌端正,是说比起其他人来容貌更胜一筹。值得一看,是说即使看上一整天也不会满足,所以值得瞻仰;又因为仅仅看着就能让人心生净信,所以是令人心生敬信的。肤色之美,说的是美好的状态;色的美,就是肤色之美。以那种肤色之美,也就是容貌成就的意思。不过古师们说,pokkhara是指身体,vaṇṇa只是指肤色。按照他们的看法,肤色和身体合起来就是vaṇṇapokkharāni,它们的状态就是vaṇṇapokkharatā。“paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya”:“具有极殊胜的容貌之美”,意指拥有最为清净的肤色与身体形态的圆满成就。“Brahmavaṇṇī”:“梵天神色”:指最殊胜的肤色,即在清净肤色中拥有最极的金色。“Brahmavacchasī”:“梵身者”:拥有与大梵天王相类之身。“Akhuddāvakāso dassanāyā”:“并非狭小之处可供瞻仰”:是说在尊者身上,可供瞻仰之处并不狭小,而是广大。他的一切大小肢体都值得一看,而且它们也都是广大的,以此显示此义。巴利
Abhirūpoti aññehi manussehi adhikarūpo. Dassanīyoti divasampi passantānaṃ atittikaraṇato dassanayoggo, dassaneneva cittapasādajananato pāsādiko. Pokkharatā vuccati sundarabhāvo, vaṇṇassa pokkharatā vaṇṇapokkharatā, tāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya, vaṇṇasampattiyāti attho. Porāṇā pana pokkharanti sarīraṃ vadanti, vaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇameva. Tesaṃ matena vaṇṇo ca pokkharañca vaṇṇapokkharāni, tesaṃ bhāvo vaṇṇapokkharatā. Iti paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti uttamaparisuddhena vaṇṇena ceva sarīrasaṇṭhānasampattiyā cāti attho. Brahmavaṇṇīti seṭṭhavaṇṇī, parisuddhavaṇṇesupi seṭṭhena suvaṇṇavaṇṇeneva samannāgatoti attho. Brahmavacchasīti mahābrahmuno sarīrasadisena sarīrena samannāgato. Akhuddāvakāso dassanāyāti bhoto sarīre dassanassa okāso na khuddako mahā. Sabbāneva te aṅgapaccaṅgāni dassanīyāneva, tāni cāpi mahantānevāti dīpeti.
他有戒,所以叫具戒者。他的戒已经成长、增长,所以叫增上戒者。以增上戒,就是以成长、增长的戒。具足,就是具备,这也是对增上戒者这个词的另一种说法。他们说的这一切,其实都只是针对五戒而言。巴利
Sīlamassa atthīti sīlavā. Vuddhaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ sīlamassāti vuddhasīlī. Vuddhasīlenāti vuddhena vaḍḍhitena sīlena. Samannāgatoti yutto, idaṃ vuddhasīlīpadasseva vevacanaṃ. Sabbametaṃ pañcasīlamattameva sandhāya vadanti.
在“言辞美妙”这些词里,言辞美妙是指他拥有美好、圆满的语句和文辞。言辞悦耳是指他拥有甜美悦耳的声音。声音就是发出的音声。因为功德圆满而称为优雅,即因往昔生于城中;或者因为住于城中,所以称为优雅;或者因为像都市女子那样娇柔,所以称为优雅。以这种优雅的言语,流利无碍是指没有障碍,远离了结巴、迟疑等过失。无唾液滴沥是指远离了唾液滴沥。有些人说话时,口水会流出来,或者淌涎,或者喷出唾沫星子,这种人的话语就叫有唾液滴沥。这里是指与此相反,没有这些过失。能令理解义理是指能够清晰地解说所说内容的前、中、后各部分义理。此处其余关于婆罗门相貌的描述,都是显而易见的。巴利
Kālyāṇavācotiādīsu kalyāṇā sundarā parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanā vācā assāti kalyāṇavāco. Kalyāṇaṃ madhuraṃ vākkaraṇaṃ assāti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo. Vākkaraṇanti udāharaṇaghoso. Guṇaparipuṇṇabhāvena pure bhavāti porī. Pure vā bhavattā porī. Nāgarikitthiyā sukhumālattanena sadisātipi porī. Tāya poriyā. Vissaṭṭhāyāti apalibuddhāya, sandiṭṭhavilambitādidosarahitāya. Anelagalāyāti elagalena virahitāya. Ekaccassa hi kathentassa elaṃ galati, lālā vā paggharati, kheḷaphusitāni vā nikkhamanti, tassa vācā elagalā nāma hoti. Tabbiparitāyāti attho. Atthassa viññāpaniyātiādimajjhapariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā bhāsitatthassa viññāpanasamatthāya. Sesamettha brāhmaṇavaṇṇe uttānameva.
425 在如此说时:当那些婆罗门这样说了之后,参吉心想:“这些婆罗门在听到别人称赞自己的功德时,没有一个人会不高兴。他们称赞我的出身等功德,是想先夸我一番,然后阻止我。可是,我沉迷于自己的功德实在不合适。让我来打断他们的话,告诉他们沙门乔达摩有多么伟大,好让他们到他那里去。”这样想过之后,他说:“那么,贤者们,也请听听我的(功德)。”在他们所说的那些诸如“从两方面善生”等与他自己功德相当的功德上,他也心想:“我算什么,沙门乔达摩的出身成就等功德是何等(殊胜)”,认为佛陀的功德远胜于自己的功德。而其他的那些话,纯粹是为了彰显世尊的殊胜伟大。这里,“我们才配”这样确定地说,是想说明:“如果因为功德伟大就该去亲近,那么,就像把芥子放在须弥山旁边,把牛蹄印里的水放在大海旁边,把草尖的露珠放在七大湖的水旁边,显得微小、低劣一样,我们的功德与沙门乔达摩的出身成就等功德相比,也是微小、低劣的。因此,我们才配去亲近那位尊者乔达摩,为了一睹他的容颜。”巴利
425.Evaṃvutteti evaṃ tehi brāhmaṇehi vutte, caṅkī, ‘‘ime brāhmaṇā attano vaṇṇe vuccamāne atussanakasatto nāma natthi, vaṇṇamassa bhaṇitvā nivāressāmāti jātiādīhi mama vaṇṇaṃ vadanti, na kho pana me yuttaṃ attano vaṇṇe rajjituṃ. Handāhaṃ etesaṃ vādaṃ bhinditvā samaṇassa gotamassa mahantabhāvaṃ ñāpetvā etesaṃ tattha gamanaṃ karomī’’ti cintetvā tena hi, bho, mamāpi suṇāthātiādimāha. Tattha yepi ‘‘ubhato sujāto’’tiādayo attano guṇehi sadisā guṇā, tepi ‘‘ko cāhaṃ, ke ca samaṇassa gotamassa jātisampattiādayo guṇā’’ti attano guṇehi uttaritareyeva maññamāno, itare pana ekanteneva bhagavato mahantabhāvadīpanatthaṃ pakāseti. Mayameva arahāmāti evaṃ niyamento cettha idaṃ dīpeti – yadi guṇamahantatāya upasaṅkamitabbo nāma hoti, yathā sineruṃ upanidhāya sāsapo, mahāsamuddaṃ upanidhāya gopadakaṃ, sattasu mahāsaresu udakaṃ upanidhāya ussāvabindu paritto lāmako, evamevaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa jātisampattiādayo guṇe upanidhāya amhākaṃ guṇā parittā lāmakā, tasmā mayameva arahāma taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamitunti.
“埋在地下和放在空中”这句话里,在王宫庭院和园林中,用石灰抹平的池塘里装满七宝后埋在地下的财富,叫“埋在地下”;而装满宫殿尖顶等高处并安放的财富,叫“放在空中”。这是按世间家族传承的说法。但对如来来说,在他出生的那一天,就有螺宝、青宝、黄宝、白宝这四种宝藏出现。其中,螺宝方圆一牛呼,青宝半由旬,黄宝三牛呼,白宝一由旬。这些宝藏所在之处,不管取走多少,都会重新充满。应当知道,世尊就是舍弃了这么多金银财宝而出家的。“年轻”等词,前面已经详细解释过了。巴利
Bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhañcāti ettha rājaṅgaṇe ceva uyyāne ca sudhāmaṭṭhā pokkharaṇiyo sattaratanapūriṃ katvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitaṃ dhanaṃ bhūmigataṃ nāma, pāsādaniyūhādayo pana pūretvā ṭhapitaṃ vehāsaṭṭhaṃ nāma. Evaṃ tāva kulapariyāyena āgataṃ. Tathāgatassa pana jātadivaseyeva saṅkho elo uppalo puṇḍarīkoti cattāro nidhayo upagatā. Tesu saṅkho gāvutiko, elo aḍḍhayojaniko, uppalo tigāvutiko puṇḍarīko yojanikoti. Tesupi gahitagahitaṭṭhānaṃ pūratiyeva. Iti bhagavā pahūtaṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ ohāya pabbajitoti veditabbo. Daharo vātiādīni heṭṭhā vitthāritāneva.
“见佛之处不小”这句话的意思是:应当知道,世尊让人见佛的空间根本不可限量。这里有一件事:据说在王舍城,有个婆罗门听说“沙门乔达摩的身量没法量”,就在世尊进城乞食时,拿了一根六十肘长的竹子,站在城门外。世尊到了以后,他举起竹子靠近站着,竹子只够到世尊的膝盖。第二天,他把两根竹子接起来,靠近站着,世尊却显得比两根竹子加起来还高出两竿。世尊问:“婆罗门,你在干什么?”他说:“我在量您的身量。”世尊说:“婆罗门,就算你拿竹子把整个轮围世界填满,接成一根竹竿带来,也还是量不出我的身量。我在四大不可计劫和十万劫中圆满巴拉密,并不是为了让别人能量出我的身量。婆罗门,如来无与伦比,不可测量。”说完,便诵出《法句》中的一首偈。偈颂结束时,八万四千众生尝到了不死甘露。巴利
Akhuddāvakāsoti ettha bhagavati aparimāṇoyeva dassanāvakāsoti veditabbo. Tatridaṃ vatthuṃ – rājagahe kira aññataro brāhmaṇo ‘‘samaṇassa kira gotamassa pamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkā’’ti sutvā bhagavato piṇḍāya pavisanakāle saṭṭhihatthaṃ veḷuṃ gahetvā nagaradvārassa bahi ṭhatvā sampatte bhagavati veḷuṃ gahetvā samīpe aṭṭhāsi, veḷu bhagavato jāṇumattaṃ pāpuṇi. Punadivase dve veḷū ghaṭetvā samīpe aṭṭhāsi , bhagavā dvinnaṃ veḷūnaṃ upari dviveṇumattameva paññāyamāno, ‘‘brāhmaṇa, kiṃ karosī’’ti āha? Tumhākaṃ pamāṇaṃ gaṇhāmīti. ‘‘Brāhmaṇa, sacepi tvaṃ sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pūretvā ṭhitaveḷuṃ ghaṭetvā āgamissasi, neva me pamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ sakkhissasi. Na hi mayā cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca tathā pāramiyo pūritā, yathā me paro pamāṇaṃ gaṇheyya, atulo brāhmaṇa, tathāgato appameyyo’’ti vatvā dhammapade gāthamāha. Gāthāpariyosāne caturāsītipāṇasahassāni amataṃ piviṃsu.
还有另一件事。据说罗睺阿修罗王身高四千八百由旬,两臂之间宽一千二百由旬,手掌和脚掌宽三百由旬,手指节长五十由旬,两眉之间宽五十由旬,额头三百由旬,头九百由旬。他心想:“我这么高大,要低下头去看世尊,我做不到。”所以他不来。有一天,他听说了世尊的功德,心想“不管怎样我都要去看一看”,于是就来了。世尊知道他的心思,便想:“在行、住、坐、卧四种威仪中,我用哪一种来让他看呢?”接着又想:“站着的时候,就算矮小的人看起来也显得高大,我还是躺着让他看吧。”于是说:“阿难,在香室旁的住处铺一张床。”然后就在那里作狮子卧。罗睺来了,仰起脖子看躺着的世尊,就像仰望天空正中的满月一样。有人问“阿修罗王,这是怎么回事?”世尊说:“阿修罗王,不是因为我不能低头看你才不来。我的巴拉密不是低着头修成的,我是昂着头行布施的。”就在那一天,罗睺皈依了。就这样,世尊让人见佛是没有丝毫障碍的。巴利
Aparampi vatthu – rāhu kira asurindo cattāri yojanasahassāni aṭṭha ca yojanasatāni ucco, bāhantaramassa dvādasayojanasatāni, hatthatalapādatalānaṃ puthulatā tīṇi yojanasatāni, aṅgulipabbāni paṇṇāsayojanāni , bhamukantaraṃ paṇṇāsayojanaṃ, nalāṭaṃ tiyojanasataṃ, sīsaṃ navayojanasataṃ. So – ‘‘ahaṃ uccosmi, satthāraṃ onamitvā oloketuṃ na sakkhissāmī’’ti na gacchati. So ekadivasaṃ bhagavato vaṇṇaṃ sutvā ‘‘yathā kathañca olokessāmī’’ti āgato. Bhagavā tassa ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā ‘‘catūsu iriyāpathesu katarena dassemī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘ṭhitako nāma nīcopi ucco viya paññāyati, nipannovassa attānaṃ dassessāmī’’ti, ‘‘ānanda, gandhakuṭipariveṇe mañcakaṃ paññāpehī’’ti vatvā tattha sīhaseyyaṃ kappesi. Rāhu āgantvā nipannaṃ bhagavantaṃ gīvaṃ unnāmetvā nabhamajjhe puṇṇacandaṃ viya ulloketi. Kimidaṃ asurindāti ca vutte, bhagavā onamitvā oloketuṃ na sakkhissāmīti na gacchinti. Na mayā asurinda adhomukhena pāramiyo pūritā, uddhaggaṃ me katvā dānaṃ dinnanti. Taṃdivasaṃ rāhu saraṇaṃ agamāsi. Evaṃ bhagavā akhuddāvakāso dassanāya.
他具备四遍清净的戒,所以是具戒者。而那种戒是圣洁的、殊胜的、清净的,因此说他是“圣戒者”。同样,从无过失的意义上说,它是善的,因此说他是“善戒者”。“以善戒”是他的同义词。他是众多老师的老师:世尊每一次说法,就有八万四千乃至无量的天与人喝下道果的甘露。因此,他是众多人的老师,是声闻弟子和应受教化者的老师之师。巴利
Catupārisuddhisīlena sīlavā. Taṃ pana sīlaṃ ariyaṃ uttamaṃ parisuddhaṃ, tenāha ariyasīlīti. Tadeva anavajjaṭṭhena kusalaṃ, tenāha kusalasīlīti. Kusalena sīlenāti idamassa vevacanaṃ. Bahūnaṃ ācariyapācariyoti bhagavato ekekāya dhammadesanāya caturāsītipāṇasahassāni aparimāṇāpi devamanussā maggaphalāmataṃ pivanti. Tasmā bahūnaṃ ācariyo, sāvakavineyyānaṃ pācariyoti.
灭尽欲贪这句话是说:世尊确实已经灭尽了一切烦恼,但这位婆罗门并不知道那些烦恼,他只是在自己能了解的范围内称赞世尊的功德。远离轻躁则是说:他已经远离了所谓装饰钵、装饰袈裟、装饰坐卧处,或者装饰这个臭皮囊……嬉笑、互相戏弄这类轻躁的行为。巴利
Khīṇakāmarāgoti ettha kāmaṃ bhagavato sabbepi kilesā khīṇā, brāhmaṇo pana te na jānāti, attano jānanaṭṭhāneyeva guṇaṃ katheti. Vigatacāpalloti ‘‘pattamaṇḍanā cīvaramaṇḍanā senāsanamaṇḍanā imassa vā pūtikāyassa…pe… kelanā paṭikelanā’’ti evaṃ vuttacāpalyavirahito.
“不以恶为前导”:就是把非恶的九种出世间法放在前面,然后行持。对于婆罗门众来说,这里指的是以舍利弗、目犍连、大迦叶等为代表的婆罗门大众。他确实不与这大众对立,所以是这大众的前导。也就是说,这大众是以沙门乔达摩为前导而行动的。另外,“不以恶为前导”也可以理解为:不是以恶为前导,不把恶放在前面而行,不想要恶。这是对谁说的呢?是对婆罗门众说的:即使对与自己为敌的婆罗门众,他也不与他们对立,只是一心希望他们得到利益和安乐。这就是这段话要表达的意思。巴利
Apāpapurekkhāroti apāpe navalokuttaradhamme purato katvā vicarati. Brahmaññāya pajāyāti sāriputtamoggallānamahākassapādibhedāya brāhmaṇapajāya. (Aviruddho hi so) etissāya pajāya purekkhāro. Ayañhi pajā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ purato katvā caratīti attho. Apica apāpapurekkhāroti na pāpupurekkhāro, na pāpaṃ purato katvā carati, pāpaṃ na icchatīti attho. Kassa? Brahmaññāya pajāya attanā saddhiṃ paṭiviruddhāyapi brāhmaṇapajāya aviruddho hitasukhatthikoyevāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Tiroraṭṭhā”是指从他国而来。“Tirojanapadā”是指从他方国土而来。“前来请问”:刹帝利智者等人,以及婆罗门、乾闼婆等人,准备好问题,想着“我们要来问难”,于是前来。在这些人当中,有些人看出提问的过失,或者察觉到在解答或接受解答方面无能,就不提问,只是默默坐着;有些人则提问。对有些人,世尊先激起他们提问的勇气,然后再解答。这样一来,他们所有人的疑惑,就像大海的波浪碰到岸边就碎掉一样,一碰到世尊就粉碎了。这里其余关于如来功德的内容,意思已经很明白了。巴利
Tiroraṭṭhāti pararaṭṭhato. Tirojanapadāti parajanapadato. Saṃpucchituṃ āgacchantīti khattiyapaṇḍitādayo ceva brāhmaṇagandhabbādayo ca pañhe abhisaṅkharitvā pucchissāmāti āgacchanti. Tattha keci pucchāya vā dosaṃ vissajjanasampaṭicchane vā asamatthataṃ sallakkhetvā apucchitvāva tuṇhī nisīdanti, keci pucchanti, kesañci bhagavā pucchāya ussāhaṃ janetvā vissajjeti. Evaṃ sabbesampi tesaṃ vimatiyo tīraṃ patvā mahāsamuddassa ūmiyo viya bhagavantaṃ patvāva bhijjanti. Sesamettha tathāgatassa vaṇṇe uttānameva.
“他们是我们的客人”,意思是说,他们是来到我们这里的客人、新来的人、应当受款待的宾客。“我通晓”,就是我知道。“无量功德”,是说像那样具足一切种智的佛陀,功德尚且无法衡量,更何况像我这样的人呢?这是为了说明这一点。而且也曾这样说过——巴利
Atithī no te hontīti te amhākaṃ āgantukā navakā pāhunakā hontīti attho. Pariyāpuṇāmīti jānāmi. Aparimāṇavaṇṇoti tathārūpeneva sabbaññunāpi appameyyavaṇṇo, pageva mādisenāti dasseti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 即使是佛陀,也会赞叹佛陀的功德,
就算用整整一劫那么长的时间也不说别的
劫数在极其漫长的时间间隔中终会耗尽,
如来的功德不会耗尽。”巴利
‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti.
那些婆罗门听了这番称赞功德的话之后,心里想:“参吉这样赞叹沙门乔达摩,这位乔达摩尊者确实有无上的功德。可是明明知道他有这些功德,参吉却还拖了这么久。来吧,我们就顺从他。”于是他们顺从地说:“那么,贤者们……”等等。巴利
Imaṃ pana guṇakathaṃ sutvā te brāhmaṇā cintayiṃsu ‘‘yathā, caṅkī, samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, anomaguṇo so bhavaṃ gotamo, evaṃ tassa guṇe jānamānena kho pana iminā aticiraṃ adhivāsitaṃ, handa naṃ anuvattāmā’’ti anuvattamānā ‘‘tena hi, bho’’tiādimāhaṃsu.
426 “令下降”就是令进入。“置于前”是指,即使对方和自己亲生儿子或孙子一样,也把他放在前面,带着他到处走。巴利
426.Opātetīti paveseti. Saṃpurekkharontīti puttamattanattamattampi samānaṃ purato katvā vicaranti.
427 “曼陀句”就是指曼陀本身,意思是明论。“如是如是相传”这句话,是在说明“听说是这样,听说是那样”这种代代相传的方式。“圣典传承”,是指被称为婆罗门圣典教说的成就。这是在说明,它们是由萨维提等偈颂和章节编集而成并传承下来的。“在其中”是指在那个曼陀句里。“宣说者”是使它流传的人。“那些人的”是问属于谁的。“曼陀句”是指被称为明论的曼陀本身。“歌咏”,是由阿吒迦等十位古婆罗门,以文句成就的方式讽诵出来的。“已说”,是别人所说的,也就是被读诵的意思。“集合”,是聚集、堆成一堆,意思是收成一团放好。“随彼歌咏”,是说现在的婆罗门,随着他们先前所歌咏的,跟着歌咏、跟着讽诵、使之宣说。“随彼言说”,是随着那个言说,这是前面那个词的另一种说法。“随说已说”,是随诵他们所说、所讽诵的。“随诵已诵”,是把他们为别人读诵的再教别人读诵。“譬如”是说他们是谁。阿吒迦等是他们的名字。据说他们用天眼观察,不做伤害他人的事,拿来和迦叶正等正觉世尊的教法对照之后,把曼陀编成了书。可是后来的婆罗门,把杀生等内容塞进去,破坏了三种吠陀,使它们和佛语相违背。巴利
427.Mantapadanti mantāyeva mantapadaṃ, vedoti attho. Itihitiha paramparāyāti evaṃ kira evaṃ kirāti paramparabhāvena āgatanti dīpeti. Piṭakasampadāyāti pāvacanasaṅkhātasampattiyā. Sāvittiādīhi chandabandhehi ca vaggabandhehi ca sampādetvā āgatanti dasseti. Tattha cāti tasmiṃ mantapade. Pavattāroti pavattayitāro. Yesanti yesaṃ santakaṃ. Mantapadanti vedasaṅkhātaṃ mantameva. Gītanti aṭṭhakādīhi dasahi porāṇakabrāhmaṇehi padasampattivasena sajjhāyitaṃ. Pavuttanti aññesaṃ vuttaṃ, vācitanti attho. Samihitanti samupabyūḷhaṃ rāsikataṃ, piṇḍaṃ katvā ṭhapitanti attho. Tadanugāyantīti etarahi brāhmaṇā taṃ tehi pubbe gītaṃ anugāyanti anusajjhāyanti vādenti. Tadanubhāsantīti taṃ anubhāsanti, idaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Bhāsitamanubhāsantīti tehi bhāsitaṃ sajjhāyitaṃ anusajjhāyanti. Vācitamanuvācentīti tehi aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācenti. Seyyathidanti te katameti attho. Aṭṭhakotiādīni tesaṃ nāmāni, te kira dibbena cakkhunā oloketvā parūpaghātaṃ akatvā kassapasammāsambuddhassa bhagavato pāvacanena saha saṃsandetvā mante ganthesuṃ, aparāpare pana brāhmaṇā pāṇātipātādīni pakkhipitvā tayo vede bhinditvā buddhavacanena saddhiṃ viruddhe akaṃsu.
428 428.“盲人串”就是盲人的行列。比如,一个明眼人拿着一根棍子的一头,一个盲人抓住另一头,另一个盲人又抓住那个盲人,再一个又抓住那个,这样五十个、六十个盲人一个接一个连在一起,就叫作“盲人串”。“相互牵连”是说他们彼此攀附着,意思是说他们离开了那个拿棍子的明眼人。据说,有个骗子看见一群盲人,就怂恿他们说:“某某村里,吃的喝的很容容易得到。”盲人们说:“先生,带我们去吧,我们给你这个那个。”骗子收了报酬后,故意在半路上离开道路,绕进一大片丛林,让前面的人抓住后面人的腋窝,然后说:“我有点事,你们先走。”说完就溜走了。那些盲人走了一整天,找不到路,哭喊着:“喂,明眼人在哪里?路在哪里?”最后找不到路,就全都死在那里了。所说的“相互牵连”就是指这些人。“前面的”是说:在前面那十位婆罗门中,连一个明眼人也没有。“中间的”是说:在中间的历代老师和老师的老师中,连一个明眼人也没有。“后面的”是说:在现在的婆罗门中,连一个明眼人也没有。巴利
428.Andhaveṇīti andhapaveṇī. Ekena hi cakkhumatā gahitayaṭṭhiyā koṭiṃ eko andho gaṇhāti, taṃ andhaṃ añño, taṃ aññoti evaṃ paṇṇāsa saṭṭhi andhā paṭipāṭiyā ghaṭitā andhaveṇīti vuccati. Paramparāsaṃsattāti aññamaññaṃ laggā, yaṭṭhiggāhakenapi cakkhumatā virahitāti attho. Eko kira dhutto andhagaṇaṃ disvā ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma gāme khajjabhojjaṃ sulabha’’nti ussāhetvā tehi ‘‘tattha no sāmi nehi, idaṃ nāma te demā’’ti vutte lañjaṃ gahetvā antarāmagge maggā okkamma mahantaṃ gacchaṃ anuparigantvā purimassa hatthena pacchimassa kacchaṃ gaṇhāpetvā ‘‘kiñci kammaṃ atthi, gacchatha tāva tumhe’’ti vatvā palāyi. Te divasampi gantvā maggaṃ avindamānā ‘‘kahaṃ, bho, cakkhumā kahaṃ maggo’’ti paridevitvā maggaṃ avindamānā tattheva mariṃsu. Te sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paramparāsaṃsattā’’ti. Purimopīti purimesu dasasu brāhmaṇesu ekopi. Majjhimopīti majjhe ācariyapācariyesu ekopi. Pacchimopīti idāni brāhmaṇesu ekopi.
“五类”是指:在巴利圣典中提到的两类之外,再加上像这样的三类,然后这样说。“两种果报”是指:真实的果报,或者不真实的果报。“于此不宜”:跋拉瓦迦,一个智者如果依“我要守护真理”而行,那么对于“我所执取的才是真理,别的都是虚妄”这一点,就不应该、也不适合一口咬定下结论。这样,世尊就为接下来的提问打开了道路,然后停了下来。巴利
Pañcakhoti pāḷiāgatesu dvīsu aññepi evarūpe tayo pakkhipitvā vadati. Dvedhāvipākāti bhūtavipākā vā abhūtavipākā vā. Nālametthāti, bhāradvāja, saccaṃ anurakkhissāmīti paṭipannena viññunā ‘‘yaṃ mayā gahitaṃ, idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti ettha ekaṃseneva niṭṭhaṃ gantuṃ nālaṃ na yuttanti upari pucchāya maggaṃ vivaritvā ṭhapesi.
430 这里,跋拉瓦迦,所谓“比丘”,就像《吉瓦咖经》和《玛哈瓦恰经》等经中那样,是世尊针对自己而说的。“于可贪著之法”:就是指能引生贪欲的法。剩下两句的解释,也是同样的道理。巴利
430.Idha, bhāradvāja, bhikkhūti jīvakasutte (ma. ni. 2.51 ādayo) viya mahāvacchasutte (ma. ni. 2.193 ādayo) viya ca attānaññeva sandhāya vadati. Lobhanīyesu dhammesūti lobhadhammesu. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
432 把信建立起来,就是让能信受的净信安住下来。亲近,就是走上前去接近。承事,就是坐在旁边陪伴。倾耳,就是把清净信的耳朵侧过去听。法,就是听所宣说的教法。持,就是把它学熟、记在心里。审查,就是从意义和理由两方面去考察思量。忍可观察,就是能够接受观察,也就是说,能这样现前把握:这里是戒,这里是定。欲,就是想去做的心愿。努力,就是精进用功。称量,就是用无常等角度去衡量判断。精勤,就是为道而精勤修行。以身证最上真理,就是以自己的俱生名身亲证涅槃,又以智慧破除烦恼,使涅槃清晰明白地显现出来,并亲眼看见。巴利
432.Saddhaṃ nivesetīti okappaniyasaddhaṃ niveseti. Upasaṅkamatīti upagacchati. Payirupāsatīti santike nisīdati. Sotanti pasādasotaṃ odahati. Dhammanti desanādhammaṃ suṇāti. Dhāretīti paguṇaṃ katvā dhāreti. Upaparikkhatīti atthato ca kāraṇato ca vīmaṃsati. Nijjhānaṃ khamantīti olokanaṃ khamanti, idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhīti evaṃ upaṭṭhahantīti attho. Chandoti kattukamyatā chando. Ussahatīti vāyamati. Tuletīti aniccādivasena tīreti. Padahatīti maggapadhānaṃ padahati. Kāyena ceva paramasaccanti sahajātanāmakāyena ca nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti, paññāya ca kilese nibbijjhitvā tadeva vibhūtaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto passati.
433 “谛随觉”就是道的觉悟。“谛证得”就是现证果。“正是他们的”如果理解成前面说的十二种法,虽然能顺着那种详细的道说讲通,但这里不是这个意思。这里真正的意思是:“正是他们的”,指那些与道相应的诸法。“勤行”就是道上的精勤。因为它对于称为现证果的“谛证得”有很大帮助,如果没有道,就不会有果。按这个方式,所有语句的意义都能理解。其余各处,都显而易见。巴利
433.Saccānubodhoti maggānubodho. Saccānuppattīti phalasacchikiriyā. Tesaṃyevāti heṭṭhā vuttānaṃ dvādasannaṃ, evaṃ dīghaṃ maggavādaṃ anulometi, tasmā nāyamattho. Ayaṃ panettha attho – tesaṃyevāti tesaṃ maggasampayuttadhammānaṃ. Padhānanti maggapadhānaṃ. Tañhi phalasacchikiriyasaṅkhātāya saccānuppattiyā bahukāraṃ, magge asati phalābhāvatoti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《埃苏咖拉经》注释巴利
6. Esukārīsuttavaṇṇanā
437 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《埃苏咖拉经》。在这里,“把份额挂起来”的意思是让他们把一份肉挂出来,用这个来说明什么叫“商队领袖的规矩”。据说,商队领袖在进入大沙漠途中,牛死了以后,就取来牛肉,给所有商人挂出一份肉,说:“吃了这些,就该付这么多钱。”所谓牛肉,有人吃,有人不吃;有人付得起钱,有人付不起。商队领袖为了收回买牛所花的钱,就强行给所有人分派份额,收取钱款,这就是“商队领袖的规矩”。同样,为了说明婆罗门们并没有得到世间众生的认可,只凭自己的法性就安立了四种侍奉,所以说了“同样,确实”等话。“他将更恶”的意思是他会有恶。“他将更善”的意思是他会有利益。或者,“更恶”是指他会拥有恶劣、低劣的生存状态。“更善”是指最上、最优越的生存状态。“更善者”就是更善。“因为出身高种姓”是指凭出身高种姓而更善。“更恶者”就是更恶。而高种姓的状态在两种家族中增长,即刹帝利家族和婆罗门家族;容貌殊胜的状态在三种家族中都有,因为吠舍也可以容貌殊胜;财富殊胜的状态在四种家族中都有,因为即使是首陀罗,乃至最低贱的旃陀罗,也确确实实拥有殊胜的财富。巴利
437.Evaṃme sutanti esukārīsuttaṃ. Tattha bilaṃ olaggeyyunti koṭṭhāsaṃ laggāpeyyuṃ, iminā satthadhammaṃ nāma dasseti. Satthavāho kira mahākantārapaṭipanno antarāmagge goṇe mate maṃsaṃ gahetvā sabbesaṃ satthikānaṃ ‘‘idaṃ khāditvā ettakaṃ mūlaṃ dātabba’’nti koṭṭhāsaṃ olaggeti, goṇamaṃsaṃ nāma khādantāpi atthi akhādantāpi, mūlaṃ dātuṃ sakkontāpi asakkontāpi. Satthavāho yena mūlena goṇo gahito, tassa nikkhamanatthaṃ sabbesaṃ balakkārena koṭṭhāsaṃ datvā mūlaṃ gaṇhāti, ayaṃ satthadhammo. Evamevaṃ brāhmaṇāpi lokassa paṭiññaṃ aggahetvā attanova dhammatāya catasso pāricariyā paññapentīti dassetuṃ evameva khotiādimāha. Pāpiyo assāti pāpaṃ assa. Seyyo assāti hitaṃ assa. Atha vā pāpiyoti pāpako lāmako attabhāvo assa. Seyyoti seṭṭho uttamo. Seyyaṃsoti seyyo. Uccākulīnatāti uccākulīnattena seyyo. Pāpiyaṃsoti pāpiyo. Uccākulīnatā ca dvīsu kulesu vaḍḍheti khattiyakule brāhmaṇakule ca, uḷāravaṇṇatā tīsu. Vessopi hi uḷāravaṇṇo hoti. Uḷārabhogatā catūsupi. Suddopi hi antamaso caṇḍālopi uḷārabhogo hotiyeva.
440 乞食行:就算是拥有千万财富的婆罗门,也还是得去乞食。古代的婆罗门哪怕有八亿财富,每天也照样去乞食一次。为什么?因为这样,当他们在穷困时去乞食,别人就不会讥嫌说“他们现在才开始乞食了”。正在轻蔑:如果有人抛弃了乞食行这个传统,靠务农、经商等来谋生,这就叫“正在轻蔑”。如牧牛者等:就像牧牛人偷走自己本该看管的财物,就成了不尽本分的人。所有例子都应当按这个方式来理解。镰刀与扁担:指割草用的镰刀和扁担。当追忆时:意思是,当他所出生的那古老父母相传的家族血统被忆念时。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
440.Bhikkhācariyanti koṭidhanenapi hi brāhmaṇena bhikkhā caritabbāva, porāṇakabrāhmaṇā asītikoṭidhanāpi ekavelaṃ bhikkhaṃ caranti. Kasmā? Duggatakāle carantānaṃ idāni bhikkhaṃ carituṃ āraddhāti garahā na bhavissatīti. Atimaññamānoti yo bhikkhācariyavaṃsaṃ haritvā sattajīvakasikammavaṇijjādīhi jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ atimaññati nāma. Gopo vāti yathā gopako attanā rakkhitabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ thenento akiccakārī hoti, evanti attho. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Asitabyābhaṅginti tiṇalāyanaasitañceva kājañca. Anussaratoti yattha jāto, tasmiṃ porāṇe mātāpettike kulavaṃse anussariyamāneti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《特南迦尼经》注释巴利
7. Dhanañjānisuttavaṇṇanā
445 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《特南迦尼经》。其中,“在南山地方”:“山”就是山峰;这是环绕王舍城而立的山,那座山南方那一片地方的名称。“在檀都罗婆利门”:据说王舍城有三十二座大城门、六十四座小城门,其中有一座就叫檀都罗婆利门,这句话就是针对这座门说的。“依仗国王”:国王派他去,命令说:“去,不要压迫百姓,把该收的田赋收上来。”他去了以后,却把所有的谷物全都收走。百姓说:“尊者,请不要害了我们!”他却说:“在王宫那边,你们这话说得太轻了。国王派我来的时候就是这样命令的。你们别哭了!”就这样,他依仗国王,掠夺婆罗门和居士们。他把大部分谷物搬进自己家里,只把很少一部分送进王宫。国王又问:“你没有压迫婆罗门和居士们吗?”他回答说:“是的,大王,这一季田里谷物歉收,所以我在没有压迫他们的情况下收取时,收上来的实在不多。”就这样,他又依仗婆罗门和居士们欺骗国王。巴利
445.Evaṃme sutanti dhanañjānisuttaṃ. Tattha dakkhiṇāgirisminti girīti pabbato, rājagahaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitapabbatassa dakkhiṇadisābhāge janapadassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṇḍulapālidvārāyāti rājagahassa kira dvattiṃsamahādvārāni catusaṭṭhikhuddakadvārāni, tesu ekaṃ taṇḍulapālidvāraṃ nāma, taṃ sandhāyevamāha. Rājānaṃ nissāyāti ‘‘gaccha manusse apīḷetvā sassabhāgaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti raññā pesito gantvā sabbameva sassaṃ gaṇhāti, ‘‘mā no, bhante, nāsehī’’ti ca vutte – ‘‘rājakule vuttaṃ mandaṃ, ahaṃ raññā āgamanakāleyeva evaṃ āṇatto, mā kanditthā’’ti evaṃ rājānaṃ nissāya brāhmaṇagahapatike vilumpati. Dhaññaṃ yebhuyyena attano gharaṃ pavesetvā appakaṃ rājakule paveseti. Kiṃ brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ na pīḷaṃ akāsīti ca vutto – ‘‘āma, mahārāja, imasmiṃ vāre khettāni mandasassāni ahesuṃ, tasmā apīḷentassa me gaṇhato na bahuṃ jāta’’nti evaṃ brāhmaṇagahapatike nissāya rājānaṃ vilumpati.
446 让他喝乳汁,就是让他喝新鲜的奶。所谓“直到那时饭食”,意思是:等你们喝完奶坐下来,马上就到吃饭的时候了。这是在说明:他们会直接在这里给我们送来早餐。关于“对父母”等经文,意思是:应当为年迈的父母寻找柔软的垫褥、被盖,精细的衣服,甘甜的食物,以及芬芳的香、花鬘等物来奉养他们。应当为子女们操办命名礼等一切该做的事,以此来养活妻儿。如果不这样做,就会招来讥嫌——应当按这个思路来理解其中的含义。巴利
446.Payo pīyatanti taruṇakhīraṃ pivatu. Tāva bhattassāti yāva khīraṃ pivitvā nisīdissatha, tāvadeva bhattassa kālo bhavissati. Idheva hi no pātarāsabhattaṃ āharissantīti dasseti. Mātāpitarotiādīsu mahallakā mātāpitaro mudukāni attharaṇapāvuraṇāni sukhumāni vatthāni madhurabhojanaṃ sugandhagandhamālādīni ca pariyesitvā posetabbā. Puttadhītānaṃ nāmakaraṇamaṅgalādīni sabbakiccāni karontena puttadāro posetabbo. Evañhi akariyamāne garahā uppajjatīti iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
447 447.“行非正法者”:在这里,“非正法”指的是五种恶行或十种恶行。“会被拖去”:意思是,为了施加五种束缚等刑罚,他们会被拖到各种地狱里去。巴利
447.Adhammacārīti pañca dussīlyakammāni vā dasa dussīlyakammāni vā idha adhammo nāma. Upakaḍḍheyyunti pañcavidhabandhanādikammakaraṇatthaṃ taṃ taṃ nirayaṃ kaḍḍheyyuṃ.
448 “行法者”,就是从事如法耕种、吠陀学问等各类工作的人。“退失”,就是退落、衰退。“增进”,就是前进、增长。“更善”,就是更殊胜、更高明。“于低劣者”,就是处于下劣、低贱之中。“死后,舍利弗”:这是世尊怀着“你到那里去为他说法”的用意,对长老所说。长老也在那一刻就前往,为大梵天王说法。但从那时起,他即使讲说四句偈,也不讲说脱离四圣谛的法。巴利
448.Dhammacārīti dhammikasivavijjādikammakārī. Paṭikkamantīti osaranti parihāyanti. Abhikkamantīti abhisaranti vaḍḍhanti. Seyyoti varataraṃ. Hīneti nihīne lāmake. Kālaṅkato ca sāriputtāti idaṃ bhagavā ‘‘tatrassa gantvā desehī’’ti adhippāyena theramāha. Theropi taṃkhaṇaṃyeva gantvā mahābrahmuno dhammaṃ desesi, tato paṭṭhāya cātuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ kathentopi catusaccavimuttaṃ nāma na kathesīti.
《瓦塞塔经》的注释巴利
8. Vāseṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
454 如是我闻这一段,就是《瓦塞塔经》。其中“在伊车能伽罗树林”是指在伊车能伽罗村不远处的树林里。“参吉”等五个人,都是憍萨罗国波斯匿王的国师。“还有其他知名的”是指还有其他许多知名的婆罗门。据说他们每六个月在两个地方集会一次:当想要净化出身时,就为了净化出身而聚集在波卡拉萨提面前,在伍咖达城;当想要净化咒语时,就聚集在伊车能伽罗。这一次,他们是为了净化咒语而集会。“其间生起了这番谈话”意思是:他们一边走动,一边说着与朋友情谊相符的闲话,就在那番谈话中间,生起了这一段不同的对话。“具戒”是指有德行。“行仪具足”是指行为和规矩都圆满。巴利
454.Evaṃme sutanti vāseṭṭhasuttaṃ. Tattha icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍeti icchānaṅgalagāmassa avidūre vanasaṇḍe. Caṅkīti ādayo pañcapi janā rañño pasenadissa kosalassa purohitā eva. Aññe ca abhiññātāti aññe ca bahū abhiññātā brāhmaṇā. Te kira chaṭṭhe chaṭṭhe māse dvīsu ṭhānesu sannipatanti. Yadā jātiṃ sodhetukāmā honti, tadā pokkharasātissa santike jātisodhanatthaṃ ukkaṭṭhāya sannipatanti. Yadā mante sodhetukāmā honti, tadā icchānaṅgale sannipatanti. Imasmiṃ kāle mantasodhanatthaṃ sannipatiṃsu. Ayamantarā kathāti yaṃ attano sahāyakabhāvānurūpaṃ kathaṃ kathentā anuvicariṃsu, tassā kathāya antarā ayamaññā kathā udapādi. Sīlavāti guṇavā. Vattasampannoti ācārasampanno.
455 “老师认可、自己承认”是指:老师们认可说“你们已经学成了”,而自己也承认说“是的,老师,我们已经学成了”。“我们是”就是“我们是”。至于“我是波卡拉萨提的,这位年轻人是呾卢迦的”,这是在说明:我是波卡拉萨提的首席弟子、最上首的弟子,而这位年轻人是呾卢迦的弟子。巴利
455.Anuññātapaṭiññātāti sikkhitā tumheti evaṃ ācariyehi anuññātā, āma ācariya sikkhitamhāti evaṃ sayañca paṭiññātā. Asmāti bhavāma. Ahaṃ pokkharasātissa, tārukkhassāyaṃ māṇavoti ahaṃ pokkharasātissa jeṭṭhantevāsī aggasisso, ayaṃ tārukkhassāti dīpeti.
“三明”是指通晓三吠陀的婆罗门。“所宣说的”是指无论从含义上还是从文句上,哪怕只宣说了哪怕一个词句。“我们在此中唯是圆满通达者”的意思是:因为完全了知那一切,所以我们在其中已经达到了究竟。现在,为了显示那种圆满通达的状态,便说了“从词句方面……”等话。其中,“在言谈上与老师相似”的意思是:在说法的场合,我们就像老师本人一样。巴利
Tevijjānanti tivedānaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ. Yadakkhātanti yaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca ekaṃ padampi akkhātaṃ. Tatra kevalinosmaseti taṃ sakalaṃ jānanato tattha niṭṭhāgatamhāti attho. Idāni taṃ kevalibhāvaṃ āvikaronto padakasmātiādimāha. Tattha jappe ācariyasādisāti kathanaṭṭhāne mayaṃ ācariyasadisāyeva.
“以业”是指十善业道的行为。这里,他先前是针对七种身业和语业而说“贤者们,只要具戒”,接着针对三种意业而说“具足行仪”。因为具足这些的人,就是具足正行。“有眼者”是以具备五种眼的特质来称呼世尊。巴利
Kammunāti dasakusalakammapathakammunā. Ayañhi pubbe sattavidhaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yato kho, bho, sīlavā hotī’’ti āha, tividhaṃ manokammaṃ sandhāya ‘‘vattasampanno’’ti. Tena samannāgato hi ācārasampanno hoti. Cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumantabhāvena bhagavantaṃ ālapati.
“已超越损减”是指已经过了不足的状态,意思是圆满。“往诣后”是指前往之后。“礼敬”就是作礼敬。巴利
Khayātītanti ūnabhāvaṃ atītaṃ, paripuṇṇanti attho. Peccāti upagantvā. Namassantīti namo karonti.
在世间生起了眼:在无明的黑暗世间,破除那黑暗之后,通过照见世间的现世利益等义理,成为眼而生起。巴利
Cakkhuṃ loke samuppannanti avijjandhakāre loke taṃ andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā lokassa diṭṭhadhammikādiatthadassanena cakkhu hutvā samuppannaṃ.
456 世尊被瓦塞塔这样赞叹恳请之后,为了摄受他们两个人,便说:“我要为你们解说”等等。其中,“我要解说”就是“我要开示”。“次第”的意思是:婆罗门的思辨暂且放一边,从草、树、虫、蛾开始,按顺序来讲。“生类分别”就是详细解说生类。因为“各类有情彼此的生类各不相同”,意思是这些有情各自所属的生类彼此不同、多种多样。巴利
456. Evaṃ vāseṭṭhena thometvā yācito bhagavā dvepi jane saṅgaṇhanto tesaṃ vo ahaṃ byakkhissantiādimāha. Tattha byakkhissanti byākarissāmi. Anupubbanti tiṭṭhatu tāva brāhmaṇacintā, tiṇarukkhakīṭapaṭaṅgato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭiyā ācikkhissāmīti attho. Jātivibhaṅganti jātivitthāraṃ. Aññamaññā hi jātiyoti tesaṃ tesañhi pāṇānaṃ jātiyo aññamaññā nānappakārāti attho.
关于“草木”这一句,他是先以无执取类的生命为例,之后再说有执取类的生命,这样就能让生命类别的区分变得清楚,因此开始了这段教导。不过,玛哈斯瓦长老被人问到时,有人问:“尊者,难道可以说无执取类是因为种子不同而有差别,有执取类是因为业不同而有差别吗?这样讲是不妥当的。”他回答:“是的,不妥当。因为业才是把众生投入母胎的因素。这些众生是由母胎成就的,所以才有种种颜色。”在“草木”这里,凡是内部有髓、外部有心材的,甚至多罗树、椰子树等,也都只是草;而内部有心材、外部有髓的,全都叫作树。它们并不会承认“我们是草”“我们是树”,也不会知道“我是草”“我是树”。即使它们不知道,由出生类别所决定的形态,仍然和它们各自所属的根本种类,比如草等,是相似的。为什么呢?因为各种出生类别彼此不同。草是一种出生类别,树是另一种出生类别。即使在草里面,多罗树是一种出生类别,椰子树又是另一种出生类别,这样应当详细展开。这段话要说明的是:凡是因出生类别而有所不同的事物,即使没有自己的承认,也没有别人的教导,仍然可以依其不同类别而被明显区分出来。如果单凭出生就能成为婆罗门,那么他也应当在没有自己的承认、也没有别人教导的情况下,能够从刹帝利、吠舍、首陀罗中被明显区分出来,但实际上并不能这样区分。所以,不是单凭出生就成为婆罗门。接下来,在“如在这些种类中”这首偈颂里,他会直接用言语把这个问题说明白。巴利
Tiṇarukkheti anupādinnakajātiṃ katvā pacchā upādinnakajātiṃ kathessāmi, evaṃ tassa jātibhedo pākaṭo bhavissatīti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Mahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, anupādinnakaṃ bījanānatāya nānaṃ, upādinnaṃ kammanānatāyāti? Evaṃ vattuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti pucchito āma na vaṭṭati. Kammañhi yoniyaṃ khipati. Yonisiddhā ime sattā nānāvaṇṇā hontīti. Tiṇarukkheti ettha antopheggū bahisārā antamaso tālanāḷikerādayopi tiṇāneva, antosārā pana bahipheggū sabbe rukkhā nāma. Na cāpi paṭijānareti mayaṃ tiṇā mayaṃ rukkhāti vā, ahaṃ tiṇaṃ, ahaṃ rukkhoti vā evaṃ na jānanti. Liṅgaṃ jātimayanti ajānantānampi ca tesaṃ jātimayameva saṇṭhānaṃ attano mūlabhūtatiṇādisadisameva hoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Aññamaññā hi jātiyo. Yasmā aññā tiṇajāti, aññā rukkhajāti. Tiṇesupi aññā tālajāti, aññā nāḷikerajāti, evaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Iminā idaṃ dasseti – yaṃ jātivasena nānā hoti, taṃ attano paṭiññaṃ paresaṃ vā upadesaṃ vināpi aññajātito visesena gayhati. Yadi ca jātiyā brāhmaṇo bhaveyya, sopi attano paṭiññaṃ paresaṃ vā upadesaṃ vinā khattiyato vessato suddato vā visesena gayheyya, na ca gayhati. Tasmā na jātiyā brāhmaṇoti. Parato pana ‘‘yathā etāsu jātīsū’’ti gāthāya etamatthaṃ vacībhedeneva āvikarissati.
像这样,先说明了无执取类中的出生,接着要说明有执取类中的出生,于是就说“从虫开始”等等。“下至蚊蚋”,意思是把蚊蚋作为下限。在这里,那些跳着走的,就叫蝗虫。因为彼此的出生类别不同,所以这些虫类依照蓝色、红色等体色的差别,出生类别也确实是种种不同的。巴利
Evaṃ anupādinnakesu jātiṃ dassetvā upādinnakesu dassento tato kīṭetiādimāha. Yāva kunthakipilliketi kunthakipillikaṃ pariyantaṃ katvāti attho. Ettha ca ye uppatitvā gacchanti, te paṭaṅgā nāma. Aññamaññā hi jātiyoti tesampi nīlarattādivaṇṇavasena jātiyo nānappakārāva honti.
小的,指黑蚁这类。大的,指兔、猫这类。巴利
Khuddaketi kāḷakādayo. Mahallaketi sasabiḷārādayo.
“腹为足者”,意思是腹部就是它们的脚,也就是说它们用腹部当脚来走。“长背者”,因为蛇从头部一直到尾端都是背,所以它们被称为长背者。巴利
Pādūdareti udarapāde, udaraṃyeva nesaṃ pādāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dīghapiṭṭhiketi sappānañhi sīsato yāva naṅguṭṭhā piṭṭhiyeva hoti, tena te ‘‘dīghapiṭṭhikā’’ti vuccanti.
水中:指在水里,也就是生在水中的。巴利
Udaketi odake, udakamhi jāte.
有翅膀的,就是鸟类。它们靠翅膀行走,所以叫“乘翅者”;因为它们在空中飞行,所以叫“行空者”。巴利
Pakkhīti sakuṇe. Te hi pattehi yantīti pattayānā, vehāsaṃ gacchantīti vihaṅgamā.
像这样展示了陆地、水中、空中众生的出生类别差别之后,现在为了说明自己的用意,就把它显示出来,于是说出“正如在这些……中”这个偈颂。它的含义在简要说明中已经讲过了。至于这里应当详细解说的内容,他自己就通过“不以头发”等语句来开示。这里的连接方式是这样的:前面说“在人当中,并没有众多由相状和出生类别造成的差别”,应当理解为就是没有这样的东西。比如什么呢?就是不以头发等来判定。因为并不存在一条固定的规则,说“婆罗门的头发是这样的,刹帝利的头发是那样的”,不像对大象、马、鹿等那样有固定的特征。应当按这个方式把一切都连接起来理解。巴利
Evaṃ thalajalākāsagocarānaṃ pāṇānaṃ jātibhedaṃ dassetvā idāni yenādhippāyena taṃ dasseti, taṃ āvikaronto yathā etāsūti gāthamāha. Tassattho saṅkhepena vuttova. Vitthārato panettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sayameva dassento na kesehītiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘natthi manussesu liṅgajātimayaṃ puthū’’ti, taṃ evaṃ natthīti veditabbaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ? Na kesehīti. Na hi – ‘‘brāhmaṇānaṃ edisā kesā honti, khattiyānaṃ edisā’’ti niyamo atthi yathā hatthiassamigādīnanti iminā nayena sabbaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
“相状并非由出生类别而成,正如在其他出生类别中一样”——这一句应当理解为是对前面所说内容的总结。这里应当这样连接理解:正因为从头发等这些特征来看,人类当中并不存在众多由出生类别决定的相状,所以应当知道:“在以婆罗门等区分的人类中,相状并非由出生类别而成,不像在其他出生类别中那样。”巴利
Liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ neva, yathā aññāsu jātisūti idaṃ pana vuttassevatthassa nigamananti veditabbaṃ. Tassāyaṃ yojanā – evaṃ yasmā imehi kesādīhi natthi manussesu liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ puthu, tasmā veditabbametaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇādibhedesu manussesu liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ neva, yathā aññāsu jātisū’’ti.
457 现在,为了说明虽然出生类别上并没有差别,“婆罗门、刹帝利”这种多样性到底是怎么来的,就说了“各自”这一偈。其中,“差别”就是指多样性。这里简要的意思是:比如畜生道众生,毛发等外形的差异纯粹是由其物种决定的,可是婆罗门等各类人各自的身体上并没有这种差异。即便如此,所谓“婆罗门、刹帝利”这种差别,在人类当中也只是名称的施设,仅仅是随顺世俗的说法而已。巴利
457. Idāni evaṃ jātibhede asatipi ‘‘brāhmaṇo khattiyo’’ti idaṃ nānattaṃ yathā jātaṃ , taṃ dassetuṃ paccattanti gāthamāha. Tattha vokāranti nānattaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yathā hi tiracchānānaṃ yonisiddhameva kesādisaṇṭhānena nānattaṃ, tathā brāhmaṇādīnaṃ attano attano sarīre taṃ natthi. Evaṃ santepi yadetaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇo khattiyo’’ti vokāraṃ, taṃ vokārañca manussesu samaññāya pavuccati, vohāramatteneva pavuccatīti.
世尊这样驳倒了跋拉瓦迦的主张之后,接着指出:如果单凭出身就能算是婆罗门,那么即使谋生方式、戒行和举止都败坏的人,也照样能算婆罗门了。可是古代的婆罗门并不承认这种人是婆罗门,世间其他有智慧的人也不承认。所以,世尊为了支持瓦塞塔的观点,说了“无论哪一种人……”等八首偈颂。其中,“护牛”是指护田,也就是耕作。“go”这个词也有土地的意思,所以这样说。“各种手艺”是指织布等种种技艺。“经商”是指做买卖。“事他者”是指为他人服役工作。“箭术者”是指以武器为生计,即使用弓箭与矛。“以国师为业者”是指从事国师的事务。巴利
Ettāvatā bhagavā bhāradvājassa vādaṃ niggaṇhitvā idāni yadi jātiyā brāhmaṇo bhaveyya, ājīvasīlācāravipannopi brāhmaṇo bhaveyya. Yasmā pana porāṇā brāhmaṇā tassa brāhmaṇabhāvaṃ na icchanti, loke ca aññepi paṇḍitamanussā, tasmā vāseṭṭhassa vādaṃ paggaṇhanto yo hi koci manussesūti aṭṭha gāthā āha. Tattha gorakkhanti khettarakkhaṃ, kasikammanti vuttaṃ hoti. Goti hi pathaviyā nāmaṃ, tasmā evamāha. Puthusippenāti tantavāyakammādinānāsippena. Vohāranti vaṇijjaṃ. Parapessenāti paresaṃ veyyāvaccakammena. Issatthanti āvudhajīvikaṃ, usuñca sattiṃ cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Porohiccenāti purohitakammena.
像这样,先根据婆罗门的传统和世间的通称,证明了活命、戒行、威仪败坏的人就不是婆罗门。既然这样,那就说明:不是靠出身才成为婆罗门,而是靠功德才成为婆罗门。所以,不管生在什么家族,只要有功德,他就是婆罗门——这就是这里的道理。这样从义理上把这条道理推导成立之后,现在为了用言辞把它揭示出来,就说了“我不说他是婆罗门”等话。它的意思是:对我来说,这个人无论是四生中哪一种,尤其是生在婆罗门所称赞的母胎中,也就是婆罗门用“两边都善生”这类说法所讲的、被称为婆罗门清净出身之道的母胎,也就是以“清净家系”来指称的母系成就;因为是从那里出生、生起的,所以被称为“母胎所生、从母而生”——我并不会仅仅因为他是母胎所生、从母而生,就说他是婆罗门。为什么呢?因为“贤者啊、女士啊”这样的称呼,只是让他和其他有执取的人有所区别,所以他才叫“称贤者”,只要他还带着执取和障碍。然而,如果有人不管生在什么地方,都因为远离贪等执取而无执取,因为舍弃一切执著而无所执取——无执取、无所执取,我说他就是婆罗门。为什么呢?因为他是“已除诸恶”的缘故。巴利
Evaṃ brāhmaṇasamayena ca lokavohārena ca ājīvasīlācāravipannassa abrāhmaṇabhāvaṃ sādhetvā evaṃ sante na jātiyā brāhmaṇo, guṇehi pana brāhmaṇo hoti. Tasmā yattha katthaci kule jāto yo guṇavā, so brāhmaṇo, ayamettha ñāyoti evametaṃ ñāyaṃ atthato āpādetvā idāni naṃ vacībhedena pakāsento na cāhaṃ brāhmaṇantiādimāha. Tassattho – ahañhi yvāyaṃ catunnaṃ yonīnaṃ yattha katthaci jāto, tatrāpi visesena yo brāhmaṇassa saṃvaṇṇitāya mātari sambhūto, taṃ yonijaṃ mattisambhavaṃ, yā cāyaṃ ubhato sujātotiādinā nayena brāhmaṇehi brāhmaṇassa parisuddhauppattimaggasaṅkhātā yoni vuttā, saṃsuddhagahaṇikoti iminā ca mātisampatti, tatopi jātasambhūtattā yonijo mattisambhavoti vuccati, taṃ yonijaṃ mattisambhavaṃ iminā ca yonijamattisambhavamattena na brāhmaṇaṃ brūmi. Kasmā? Yasmā, bho bhoti, vacanamattena aññehi sakiñcanehi visiṭṭhattā bhovādi nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano sapalibodho. Yo panāyaṃ yattha katthaci jātopi rāgādikiñcanābhāvena akiñcano, sabbagahaṇapaṭinissaggena anādāno, akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ, tamahaṃ brūmibrāhmaṇaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā bāhitapāpoti.
458 458. “还有什么呢?断除一切结缚”等等,是二十七首偈颂。其中,“一切结缚”指十种结缚。“他不战栗”指他不因渴爱的战栗而战栗。“超越附着”指已经超越了贪着等附着。“离系”指从四种生中脱离,或从一切烦恼中解脱。巴利
458. Kiñcabhiyyo sabbasaṃyojanaṃ chetvātiādi sattavīsati gāthā. Tattha sabbasaṃyojananti dasavidhasaṃyojanaṃ. Na paritassatīti taṇhāparitassanāya na paritassati. Saṅgātiganti rāgasaṅgādayo atikkantaṃ. Visaṃyuttanti catūhi yonīhi sabbakilesehi vā visaṃyuttaṃ.
“结缚”指怨恨。“皮条”指渴爱。“系绳”指套索,这是“见现起”的别名。“连同次第”中的“次第”,指的是把套索穿进去的结,这是“见随眠”的名称。“已举闩”里,“闩”指无明。“觉者”指觉悟四谛之人。“堪忍”指忍耐。巴利
Naddhinti upanāhaṃ. Varattanti taṇhaṃ. Sandānanti yuttapāsaṃ, diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sahanukkamanti anukkamo vuccati pāse pavesanagaṇṭhi, diṭṭhānusayassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ukkhittapalighanti ettha palighoti avijjā. Buddhanti catusaccabuddhaṃ. Titikkhatīti khamati.
“忍力”是指安忍的忍耐力。不过,这种忍耐力只生起一次,还不能叫“力量之军”;只有一次又一次反复生起,才叫“力量之军”。正因为有它存在,才有“力量之军”。巴利
Khantibalanti adhivāsanakhantibalaṃ. Sā pana sakiṃ uppannā balānīkaṃ nāma na hoti, punappunaṃ uppannā pana hoti. Tassā atthitāya balānīkaṃ.
持头陀支者就是“具有头陀支的人”。具有德行的人就是“持戒者”。远离了贪等漏泄的人就是“无漏泄者”。也有版本写作“Anussuta”,意思同样是无漏泄。“调伏者”指的是不亲近、不依止的人。巴利
Vatavantanti dhutaṅgavantaṃ. Sīlavantanti guṇavantaṃ. Anussadanti rāgādiussadavirahitaṃ. ‘‘Anussuta’’ntipi pāṭho, anavassutanti attho. Dantanti nibbisevanaṃ.
不染着就是不黏附。诸欲,是指烦恼欲与事欲。巴利
Na limpatīti na allīyati. Kāmesūti kilesakāmavatthukāmesu.
他了知苦,就在这同一生命里灭尽。这里所说的“苦的灭尽”,指的就是阿拉汉果。“了知”是指通过证悟而知道。“已舍重担”是指已经放下重担,也就是把蕴、烦恼、行和五种欲乐这些重担都卸下之后而安住。“离系”一词的意思和前面所说的一样。巴利
Dukkhassapajānāti, idheva khayanti ettha arahattaphalaṃ dukkhakkhayoti adhippetaṃ. Pajānātīti adhigamavasena jānāti. Pannabhāranti ohitabhāraṃ, khandhakilesaabhisaṅkhārakāmaguṇabhāre otāretvā ṭhitaṃ. Visaṃyuttapadaṃ vuttatthameva.
甚深慧,是指在甚深的所缘中运作的智慧。聪慧者,是指凭天生智慧而有智慧的人。巴利
Gambhīrapaññanti gambhīresu ārammaṇesu pavattapaññaṃ. Medhāvinti pakatipaññāya paññavantaṃ.
“与出家者两方……”意思是:既与出家者不相混杂,也与这两方都不相混杂,也就是与这两者都不相混杂。“不行于居家”中,“居家”指的是五种欲乐的住处,意思是不攀附、不黏着于那里。“少欲”意思是没有欲求。巴利
Anāgārehicūbhayanti anāgārehi ca visaṃsaṭṭhaṃ ubhayañca, dvīhipi cetehi visaṃsaṭṭhamevāti attho. Anokasārinti okaṃ vuccati pañcakāmaguṇālayo, taṃ anallīyamānanti attho. Appicchanti anicchaṃ.
对有渴爱的人,指那些还有渴爱的众生;对无渴爱的人,指那些已经离了渴爱的众生。巴利
Tasesūti sataṇhesu. Thāvaresūti nittaṇhesu.
对于执杖者,指的是手持棍杖的众生。已寂灭,指的是通过烦恼的寂灭而达到寂静。对于有执取者,指的是有执取的众生。巴利
Attadaṇḍesūti gahitadaṇḍesu. Nibbutanti kilesanibbānena nibbutaṃ. Sādānesūti saupādānesu.
已放下者,就是已堕落者。巴利
Ohitoti patito.
459 Akakkasa 指没有过失。因为连有瑕疵的树木也会被称为 sakakkasa。Viññāpana 指能让人明白意义。Sacca 指不欺骗人。Udīraye 指说。Yāya nābhisajje 的意思是:用某种言语不对他人造成执著或黏附,也就是说不粗恶的言语;其含义是:以那样的、不粗恶的言语而说。巴利
459.Akakkasanti niddosaṃ. Sadoso hi rukkhopi sakakkasoti vuccati. Viññāpaninti atthaviññāpanikaṃ. Saccanti avisaṃvādikaṃ. Udīrayeti bhaṇati. Yāyanābhisajjeti yāya girāya parassa sajjanaṃ vā lagganaṃ vā na karoti, tādisaṃ apharusaṃ giraṃ bhāsatīti attho.
长的,是指串在经上的物品。短的,是指散放的物品。细的,是指微小的。粗的,是指巨大的。美丑的,是指好看与不好看的。因为长的物品既有不值钱的,也有很值钱的;短等物品也是如此。所以,仅凭这些还不能涵盖一切,而用“美丑”这一项就涵盖了一切。巴利
Dīghanti suttāruḷhabhaṇḍaṃ. Rassanti vippakiṇṇabhaṇḍaṃ. Aṇunti khuddakaṃ. Thūlanti mahantaṃ. Subhāsubhanti sundarāsundaraṃ. Dīghabhaṇḍañhi appagghampi hoti mahagghampi. Rassādīsupi eseva nayo. Iti ettāvatā na sabbaṃ pariyādiṇṇaṃ, ‘‘subhāsubha’’nti iminā pana pariyādiṇṇaṃ hoti.
“无执著”即无渴爱。巴利
Nirāsayanti nittaṇhaṃ.
Ālaya 指渴爱的执著基础。Aññāya 指已经了知。Amatogadha 指不死界的内部。Anuppatta 指已经进入。巴利
Ālayāti taṇhālayā. Aññāyāti jānitvā. Amatogadhanti amatabbhantaraṃ. Anuppattanti anupaviṭṭhaṃ.
“Ubho saṅga”说的是这两者都是执著。因为福业会让人黏着在天界,非福业会让人黏着在恶趣,所以世尊说这两者都是执著。“Upaccagā”的意思是已经超越。巴利
Ubho saṅganti ubhayampetaṃ saṅgaṃ. Puññañhi sagge laggāpeti, apuññaṃ apāye, tasmā ubhayampetaṃ saṅganti āha. Upaccagāti atīto.
没有浑浊,就是远离了会让心浑浊的烦恼。喜和有都已灭尽,就是喜已灭尽、有已灭尽。巴利
Anāvilanti āvilakaraṇakilesavirahitaṃ. Nandībhavaparikkhīṇanti parikkhīṇanandiṃ parikkhīṇabhavaṃ.
在“Yo ima”这一偈中,无明正因为具有欺骗性,所以被称为“歧途”;因为是大困境,所以被称为“难处”;因为导致流转,所以被称为“轮回”;因为令人迷惑,所以被称为“痴”。“已渡过”是指已经渡过四种瀑流。“到彼岸”是指已经到达涅槃。“入禅者”是指依所缘相专注而入禅修的人。“无动”是指没有渴爱。“无取著而寂灭”是指不执取任何东西,通过灭尽一切烦恼而寂灭。巴利
‘‘Yo ima’’nti gāthāya avijjāyeva visaṃvādakaṭṭhena palipatho, mahāviduggatāya duggaṃ, saṃsaraṇaṭṭhena saṃsāro, mohanaṭṭhena mohoti vutto. Tiṇṇoti caturoghatiṇṇo. Pāraṅgatoti nibbānaṃ gato. Jhāyīti ārammaṇalakkhaṇūpanijjhānavasena jhāyī. Anejoti nittaṇho. Anupādāyanibbutoti kiñci gahaṇaṃ aggahetvā sabbakilesanibbānena nibbuto.
欲,指两种欲。无家者,指成为无家者。游方,指四处游方。欲与有已尽,指欲已尽、有已尽。巴利
Kāmeti duvidhepi kāme. Anāgāroti anāgāro hutvā. Paribbajeti paribbajati. Kāmabhavaparikkhīṇanti khīṇakāmaṃ khīṇabhavaṃ.
人的束缚,指人对五种欲乐的束缚。天的束缚,指天人对五种欲乐的束缚。已脱离一切束缚,指已脱离一切烦恼的束缚。巴利
Mānusakaṃ yoganti mānusakaṃ pañcakāmaguṇayogaṃ. Dibbaṃ yoganti dibbaṃ pañcakāmaguṇayogaṃ. Sabbayogavisaṃyuttanti sabbakilesayogavisaṃyuttaṃ.
“喜”是指对五种欲乐的欢喜。“不喜”是指对修习善法感到厌倦。“精进者”是指具足精进力的人。巴利
Ratinti pañcakāmaguṇaratiṃ. Aratinti kusalabhāvanāya ukkaṇṭhitaṃ. Vīranti vīriyavantaṃ.
“善逝”是指到达了殊胜之处,或者是以殊胜的修行方式而到达。巴利
Sugatanti sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gataṃ, sundarāya vā paṭipattiyā gataṃ.
“去”是指投生。“前”是指过去。“后”是指未来。“中”是指现在。“障碍”是指能制造障碍的烦恼。巴利
Gatinti nibbattiṃ. Pureti atīte. Pacchāti anāgate. Majjheti paccuppanne. Kiñcananti kiñcanakārako kileso.
“大仙”是指以寻求广大功德为意义的大仙。“胜者”是指已经取得胜利、战胜一切的人。巴利
Mahesinti mahante guṇe pariyesanaṭṭhena mahesiṃ. Vijitāvinanti vijitavijayaṃ.
460 世尊这样从功德方面说明只有漏尽者才是真正的婆罗门之后,为了指出那些固执地认为“凭出身就是婆罗门”的人并不了解这一点,并且揭示他们那种见解其实是错误的见解,于是说了“这只是名称而已”这两首偈颂。它的意思是:所谓婆罗门、刹帝利、跋拉瓦迦、瓦塞塔这些姓名和族姓,都是人为编造、造作、建构出来的,这只是世间的共同称呼,只是日常交流的说法而已。为什么呢?因为这种称呼是随顺众人的习俗而共同形成的。一个人出生的时候,各地的亲戚族人就为他编造、安立了这些称呼。如果没有这样编造,那么谁也不能一看到某个人就知道“这是婆罗门”或者“这是跋拉瓦迦”。这个被编造出来的东西,长久以来一直作为随眠潜藏在人们心里,在那些不了解真相的人心中,就成了一种固执的错误见解。这个被编造出来的姓名族姓,本来只是“一个名称而已,是为了日常称呼而编造的”,但众生不了解这一点,所以这种错误见解就在他们心中长久地潜藏下来了。正是由于这种随眠潜藏的缘故,那些不了解这个姓名族姓真相的人才会说“凭出身就是婆罗门”,他们其实并不知道真相,却这样说了。巴利
460. Evaṃ bhagavā guṇato khīṇāsavaṃyeva brāhmaṇaṃ dassetvā ye jātito brāhmaṇoti abhinivesaṃ karonti, te idaṃ ajānantā, sāva nesaṃ diṭṭhi duddiṭṭhīti dassento samaññā hesāti gāthādvayamāha. Tassattho – yadidaṃ brāhmaṇo khattiyo bhāradvājo vāseṭṭhoti nāmagottaṃ pakappitaṃ kataṃ abhisaṅkhataṃ, samaññā hesā lokasmiṃ, vohāramattanti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā samuccā samudāgataṃ samaññāya āgataṃ. Etañhi tattha tattha jātakāleyevassa ñātisālohitehi pakappitaṃ kataṃ. No ce naṃ evaṃ pakappeyyuṃ, na koci kiñci disvā ayaṃ brāhmaṇoti vā bhāradvājoti vā jāneyya. Evaṃ pakappitaṃ petaṃ dīgharattānusayitaṃ, diṭṭhigatamajānataṃ, taṃ pakappitaṃ nāmagottaṃ ‘‘nāmagottamattametaṃ, vohāratthaṃ pakappita’’nti, ajānantānaṃ sattānaṃ hadaye dīgharattaṃ diṭṭhigatamanusayitaṃ. Tassa anusayitattā taṃ nāmagottaṃ ajānantā no pabrunti, ‘‘jātiyā hoti brāhmaṇo’’ti ajānantāva evaṃ vadantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
像这样指出:“那些认定‘从出身就是婆罗门’的人,不知道这只是一种称呼,他们的这种见解就是恶见。”然后,为了彻底否定出身论、确立业论,说了“不是由出身……”等话。其中,为了详细解释“以业”这半首偈颂,说了“农夫以业……”等话。这里的“以业”,是指现世产生农耕等行为的思业。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘ye ‘jātito brāhmaṇo’ti abhinivesaṃ karonti, te idaṃ vohāramattaṃ ajānantā, sāva nesaṃ diṭṭhi duddiṭṭhī’’ti dassetvā idāni nippariyāyameva jātivādaṃ paṭikkhipanto kammavādañca patiṭṭhapento na jaccātiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘kammunā’’ti upaḍḍhagāthāya vitthāraṇatthaṃ kassako kammunātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kammunāti paccuppannena kasikammādinibbattakacetanākammunā.
以“缘起”为所见的人,就是“以此为缘,如是而有”这样见到缘起的人。通达业与业果的人:投生到应当受到恭敬或轻蔑的家族中,是由业力决定的;其他种种低劣或殊胜的差别,也是在低劣或殊胜的业成熟时发生的。这样,就是通达业与业果的人。巴利
Paṭiccasamuppādadassāti iminā paccayena evaṃ hotīti evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādadassāvino. Kammavipākakovidāti sammānāvamānārahakule kammavasena uppatti hoti, aññāpi hīnapaṇītatā hīnapaṇīte kamme vipaccamāne hotīti. Evaṃ kammavipākakusalā.
在“世间以业而转”这首偈颂里,世间、众生、有情这三个词意思完全一样,只是说法不同。这里第一句应当理解为:驳斥“有梵天神、大梵天王、最胜者、支配者”这种见解。因为世间确实是随着业在种种趣处中流转,那谁是他的支配者呢?第二句说明:这样由业所生,又在生命相续中,依过去和现在不同的业而流转;他一边感受苦乐,一边现出低劣、殊胜等各种差别,持续不断地流转。第三句把同一个意思归结为:这样看来,众生在一切情况下都以业为系缚,只被业绑着而流转,不是别的什么。第四句用譬喻把这一点说清楚。就像马车在行走时,车轴销钉是它的系缚处,没有销钉系住,车就走不了;同样,世间无论生起还是相续,业就是它的系缚处,没有业系住,就不会生起,也不会流转。巴利
Kammunā vattatīti gāthāya pana lokoti vā pajāti vā sattoti vā ekoyevattho, vacanamattabhedo. Purimapadena cettha ‘‘atthi brahmā mahābrahmā seṭṭho sajitā’’ti diṭṭhiyā paṭisedho veditabbo. Kammunā hi tāsu tāsu gatīsu vattati loko, tassa ko sajitāti. Dutiyapadena ‘‘evaṃ kammunā nibbattopi ca pavattepi atītapaccuppannabhedena kammunā vattati, sukhadukkhāni paccanubhonto hīnapaṇītādibhedañca āpajjanto pavattatī’’ti dasseti. Tatiyena tamevatthaṃ nigameti ‘‘evaṃ sabbathāpi kammanibandhanā sattā kammeneva baddhā hutvā pavattanti, na aññathā’’ti. Catutthena tametthaṃ upamāya vibhāveti. Yathā hi rathassa yāyato āṇi nibandhanaṃ hoti, na tāya anibaddho yāti, evaṃ lokassa nibbattato ca pavattato ca kammaṃ nibandhanaṃ, na tena anibaddho nibbattati na pavattati.
现在,因为世间就是这样被业所系缚的,所以为了显示通过最殊胜的业而获得最殊胜的状态,说了“以苦行……”这两首偈颂。其中,“以苦行”是指头陀支的苦行。“以梵行”是指远离淫欲。“以自制”是指戒律。“以调伏”是指调御诸根。“由此”是指由这种最殊胜、清净、已成为梵的业,而成为婆罗门。为什么?因为这是最上的婆罗门,也就是说,这种业被称为最上的婆罗门功德。也有读作“梵的”的版本。这里它的词义是:能带来梵,所以叫“梵的”,意思是能成就婆罗门的身份。巴利
Idāni yasmā evaṃ kammanibandhano loko, tasmā seṭṭhena kammunā seṭṭhabhāvaṃ dassento tapenāti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha tapenāti dhutaṅgatapena. Brahmacariyenāti methunaviratiyā. Saṃyamenāti sīlena . Damenāti indriyadamena. Etenāti etena seṭṭhena parisuddhena brahmabhūtena kammunā brāhmaṇo hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā etaṃ brāhmaṇamuttamaṃ, yasmā etaṃ kammaṃ uttamo brāhmaṇaguṇoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Brahmāna’’ntipi pāṭho. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – brahmaṃ ānetīti brahmānaṃ, brāhmaṇabhāvaṃ āvahatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
第二首偈颂里说的“寂静者”,是指烦恼已经止息的人。“梵天神与帝释天神”,就是梵天神和帝释天神。意思是,像这样的人,不只是一位婆罗门,在明理的智者看来,他其实就是梵天神和帝释天神。瓦塞塔,你要这样去理解——这就是这句话要说的。其余各处,意思都很清楚。巴利
Dutiyagāthāya santoti santakileso. Brahmā sakkoti brahmā ca sakko ca, yo evarūpo, so na kevalaṃ brāhmaṇo, atha kho brahmā ca sakko ca so vijānataṃ paṇḍitānaṃ, evaṃ vāseṭṭha, jānāhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
第9《苏跋经》的注释巴利
9. Subhasuttavaṇṇanā
462 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《苏跋经》。其中,“多迭亚之子”是指住在杜提村的多迭亚婆罗门的儿子。“成为成就者”是指成为圆满、具足的人。“合乎道理的法”是指有因有缘的法。“善”是指没有过失的。巴利
462.Evaṃme sutanti subhasuttaṃ. Tattha todeyyaputtoti tudigāmavāsino todeyyabrāhmaṇassa putto. Ārādhako hotīti sampādako hoti paripūrako. Ñāyaṃ dhammanti kāraṇadhammaṃ. Kusalanti anavajjaṃ.
463 邪行之道,指的是不能导向解脱的不善修行方式。正行之道,指的是能导向解脱的善的修行方式。巴利
463.Micchāpaṭipattinti aniyyānikaṃ akusalapaṭipadaṃ. Sammāpaṭipattinti niyyānikaṃ kusalapaṭipadaṃ.
在“大事务”等说法里,因为有众多办事的人,或者有众多工具,事务很多,所以叫“大事务”。因为有盛大的取名、庆典等仪式,所以叫“大仪式”。因为今天要做这件事、明天要做那件事,有这么多叫作“管理”的待办事项,所以叫“大管理”。因为众人投入劳作时,有那种叫作“逼迫”的大规模筹备,所以叫“大筹备”。“在家的工作处”就是指在家从事的事业。每一个说法都应该这样理解。在这里,农耕因为要从犁尖等工具开始,以寻求各种工具的方式,所以是“大事务”的性质;经商则是把现有的货物拿来转手买卖,应当知道它是“小事务”的性质。失败的时候,比如农耕遇到干旱或洪涝等灾害,经商则因为对宝石、黄金等缺乏技巧或不熟练等,事业就收获微薄,甚至血本无归。反过来,成功的时候就能获得大果,就像那位年幼的学徒一样。巴利
Mahaṭṭhantiādīsu mahantehi veyyāvaccakarehi vā upakaraṇehi vā bahūhi attho etthāti mahaṭṭhaṃ. Mahantāni nāmaggahaṇamaṅgalādīni kiccāni etthāti mahākiccaṃ. Idaṃ ajja kattabbaṃ, idaṃ sveti evaṃ mahantāni adhikārasaṅkhātāni adhikaraṇāni etthāti mahādhikaraṇaṃ. Bahūnaṃ kamme yuttappayuttatāvasena pīḷāsaṅkhāto mahāsamārambho etthāti mahāsamārambhaṃ. Gharāvāsakammaṭṭhānanti gharāvāsakammaṃ. Evaṃ sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Kasikamme cettha naṅgalakoṭiṃ ādiṃ katvā upakaraṇānaṃ pariyesanavasena mahaṭṭhatā, vaṇijjāya yathāṭhitaṃyeva bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā parivattanavasena appaṭṭhatā veditabbā. Vipajjamānanti avuṭṭhiativuṭṭhiādīhi kasikammaṃ, maṇisuvaṇṇādīsu acchekatādīhi ca vaṇijjakammaṃ appaphalaṃ hoti, mūlacchedampi pāpuṇāti. Vipariyāyena sampajjamānaṃ mahapphalaṃ cūḷantevāsikassa viya.
464 同样,就像农耕的事一旦失败,收成就很少;在家的事业也是这样。因为一个没做过善事的人,死后会投生到地狱。据说曾有个叫大财将军的人,是婆罗门的信徒,他临死的时候,地狱的景象出现了。婆罗门们问他:“你看到了什么?”他说:“一座血红的屋子。”他们说:“贤者,那就是梵天界啊。”他问:“贤者,梵天界在哪里?”他们答:“在上面。”他说:“可它在我下面出现。”虽然他们说是上面,他死后还是投生到了地狱。大家说:“这人在我们的祭祀里犯了错。”于是拿了一千钱出来,把他抬走。反过来,如果事业成功,果报就很大。因为一个做过善事的人,死后会投生到天界。这整个内容可以用《古帝喇天宫谈》来说明。同样,就像经商的事一旦失败,收益就很少;戒行不圆满、靠邪命过活的出家事业也是这样。这类人既得不到禅那等快乐,也得不到天界和解脱。但如果成功,果报就很大。因为一个人戒行圆满,增长观智,甚至能证得阿拉汉果。巴利
464.Evameva khoti yathā kasikammaṭṭhānaṃ vipajjamānaṃ appaphalaṃ hoti, evaṃ gharāvāsakammaṭṭhānampi. Akatakalyāṇo hi kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbattati. Mahādattasenāpati nāma kireko brāhmaṇabhatto ahosi, tassa maraṇasamaye nirayo upaṭṭhāsi. So brāhmaṇehi ‘‘kiṃ passasī’’ti vutto? Lohitagharanti āha. Brahmaloko bho esoti. Brahmaloko nāma bho kahanti? Uparīti. Mayhaṃ heṭṭhā upaṭṭhātīti. Kiñcāpi heṭṭhā upaṭṭhāti , tathāpi uparīti kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbatto. ‘‘Iminā amhākaṃ yaññe doso dinno’’ti sahassaṃ gahetvā nīharituṃ adaṃsu. Sampajjamānaṃ pana mahapphalaṃ hoti. Katakalyāṇo hi kālaṃ katvā sagge nibbattati. Sakalāya guttilavimānakathāya dīpetabbaṃ. Yathā pana taṃ vaṇijjakammaṭṭhānaṃ vipajjamānaṃ appaphalaṃ hoti, evaṃ sīlesu aparipūrakārino anesanāya yuttassa pabbajjākammaṭṭhānampi. Evarūpā hi neva jhānādisukhaṃ na saggamokkhaṃ labhati. Sampajjamānaṃ pana mahapphalaṃ hoti. Sīlāni hi pūretvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento arahattampi pāpuṇāti.
婆罗门们说“乔达摩尊者”——他在这里问的是什么呢?婆罗门们主张:“出家人当中,没有人能够圆满这五种法,只有在家人才能圆满。”可是沙门乔达摩却一再地说:“年轻人啊,不管是在家人还是出家人,我……”他始终不肯放弃出家人,我猜想他根本没有注意到我问的是什么,所以才以“布施”为首来问这五种法。“如果你不觉得为难”——意思是,如果按照婆罗门们所宣说的那样在这里说,对你来说并不沉重,如果你没有什么不舒服,那就请说吧。“尊者,对我来说并不为难”——他为什么这样说呢?因为跟那些貌似有智慧的人说话很痛苦,他们一字一句地挑毛病。而真正有智慧的人听了说法之后,讲得好就赞叹;如果讲得不好,在经文、句义、言辞上哪里有不对,就一一纠正过来。可是世间没有谁能跟世尊一样真正有智慧,所以他说:“乔达摩尊者,对我来说并不为难,在那里,无论是您或者像您这样尊贵的人坐着。”“真实”指说真实语。“苦行”指修苦行。“梵行”指远离淫欲。“诵习”指学习咒语。“布施”指舍弃财物。巴利
Brāhmaṇā, bho gotamoti idha kiṃ pucchāmīti pucchati? Brāhmaṇā vadanti – ‘‘pabbajito ime pañca dhamme pūretuṃ samattho nāma natthi, gahaṭṭhova pūretī’’ti. Samaṇo pana gotamo – ‘‘gihissa vā ahaṃ māṇava pabbajitassa vā’’ti punappunaṃ vadati, neva pabbajitaṃ muñcati, mayhameva pucchaṃ maññe na sallakkhetīti cāgasīsena pañca dhamme pucchāmīti pucchati. Sace te agarūti sace tuyhaṃ yathā brāhmaṇā paññapenti, tathā idha bhāsituṃ bhāriyaṃ na hoti, yadi na koci aphāsukabhāvo hoti, bhāsassūti attho. Na kho me, bhoti kiṃ sandhāyāha? Paṇḍitapaṭirūpakānañhi santike kathetuṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, te pade pade akkhare akkhare dosameva vadanti. Ekantapaṇḍitā pana kathaṃ sutvā sukathitaṃ pasaṃsanti, dukkathite pāḷipadaatthabyañjanesu yaṃ yaṃ virujjhati, taṃ taṃ ujuṃ katvā denti. Bhagavatā ca sadiso ekantapaṇḍito nāma natthi, tenāha ‘‘na kho me, bho gotama, garu, yatthassu bhavanto vā nisinno bhavantarūpo vā’’ti. Saccanti vacīsaccaṃ. Tapanti tapacariyaṃ. Brahmacariyanti methunaviratiṃ. Ajjhenanti mantagahaṇaṃ. Cāganti āmisapariccāgaṃ.
466 所谓将被引至,是指将被引至无知状态。他说了这话:他被世尊用盲人队列的比喻驳倒后,无法反驳回去,就像一只瘦弱的狗把野兽惊起来,让野兽面对主人,自己却退到一边;同样地,他把责任推给老师,说了“婆罗门……”等话。其中,“波卡拉萨提”是他的名字,也叫“沸伽罗娑夷”。据说他的身体像白莲花一样洁白,在天帝城里就像竖起的银拱门一样光彩夺目;他的头则像黑蓝色的蓝宝石做成的;胡须在圆月般的脸上就像一抹乌云;眼睛像青莲花;鼻子像银管一样端正圆润,极其洁净;手掌、脚掌和脸都像经过蜡红抛光处理一样光洁。这位婆罗门的形体极其庄严。在没有人治理的地方,也适合让这位婆罗门做国王,他的威光就是如此显赫。因为他的形象像莲花,所以人们称他为“波卡拉萨提”;又因为他是在莲花中化生的,不是从母胎出生的,所以人们也称他为“沸伽罗娑夷”。“Opamañño”指他属于乌跋摩尼族。“Subhagavaniko”指他是郁伽咤地区幸运林的主人。“Hassakaṃyevā”指这仅仅是可笑的事。“Nāmakaṃyevā”指这仅仅是低劣的事。那本身因为没有实义,所以是空洞的;因为空洞,所以是虚妄的。现在,世尊为了连同他的老师一起驳倒他,便说了“年轻人啊,究竟什么呢……”等等。巴利
466.Pāpito bhavissatīti. Ajānanabhāvaṃ pāpito bhavissati. Etadavocāti bhagavatā andhaveṇūpamāya niggahito taṃ paccāharituṃ asakkonto yathā nāma dubbalasunakho migaṃ uṭṭhapetvā sāmikassa abhimukhaṃ katvā sayaṃ apasakkati, evamevaṃ ācariyaṃ apadisanto evaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇo’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha pokkharasātīti idaṃ tassa nāmaṃ, ‘‘pokkharasāyī’’tipi vuccati. Tassa kira kāyo setapokkharasadiso devanagare ussāpitarajatatoraṇaṃ viya sobhati, sīsaṃ panassa kāḷavaṇṇaindanīlamayaṃ viya, massupi candamaṇḍale kāḷamegharāji viya khāyati, akkhīni nīluppalasadisāni, nāsā rajatapanāḷikā viya suvaṭṭitā suparisuddhā, hatthapādatalāni ceva mukhañca katalākhārasaparikammaṃ viya sobhati. Ativiya sobhaggappatto brāhmaṇassa attabhāvo. Arājake ṭhāne rājānaṃ kātuṃ yuttamimaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ, evamesa sassiriko, iti naṃ pokkharasadisattā ‘‘pokkharasātī’’ti sañjānanti, pokkhare pana so nibbatto, na mātukucchiyanti iti naṃ pokkhare sayitattā ‘‘pokkharasāyī’’tipi sañjānanti. Opamaññoti upamaññagotto. Subhagavanikoti ukkaṭṭhāya subhagavanassa issaro. Hassakaṃyevāti hasitabbakaññeva. Nāmakaṃyevāti lāmakaṃyeva. Tadeva taṃ atthābhāvena rittakaṃ. Rittakattā ca tucchakaṃ. Idāni naṃ bhagavā sācariyakaṃ niggaṇhituṃ kiṃ pana māṇavātiādimāha.
467 在这其中,“他们中哪种话更优胜?”意思是哪种话对他们来说更好、更值得称赞。“依世俗”是指依照世间的共同约定。“衡量”是指经过掂量、仔细考察。“审察”是指清楚了知之后。“与义相应”是指有合理的依据。这样一来,就是说不脱离世间言说,经过掂量、了知,并以合理依据来说,在这种情况下才算得上是更优胜。“覆盖”是指被遮住。“遮掩”是指被挡住。“笼罩”是指被缠裹。“遍覆”是指被紧紧包裹、缠绕。巴利
467. Tattha katamā nesaṃ seyyoti katamā vācā tesaṃ seyyo, pāsaṃsataroti attho. Sammuccāti sammutiyā lokavohārena. Mantāti tulayitvā pariggaṇhitvā. Paṭisaṅkhāyāti jānitvā. Atthasaṃhitanti kāraṇanissitaṃ. Evaṃ santeti lokavohāraṃ amuñcitvā tulayitvā jānitvā kāraṇanissitaṃ katvā kathitāya seyyabhāve sati. Āvutoti āvarito. Nivutoti nivārito. Ophuṭoti onaddho. Pariyonaddhoti paliveṭhito.
468 “执著”等词的意思和前面说的一样。“乔达摩尊者,如果这个道理成立”意思是:如果这个理由确实存在。“那个火”是说,因为没有烟、炭灰等,那个火就有明亮的火焰、有色彩、清澈透亮。“年轻人,我举出同样的比喻”意思是我举出与那相对应的比喻。这里说的是:就像依靠草和柴燃烧的火,因为有烟、炭灰等而有缺陷;同样,依靠五种欲乐而生起的喜,因为有生、老、病、死、忧愁等而有缺陷。又像舍弃了草和柴的火,因为没有烟等而清净;同样,与出世间两种禅那相应的喜,因为没有生等而清净。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
468.Gadhitotiādīni vuttatthāneva. Sace taṃ, bho gotama, ṭhānanti sace etaṃ kāraṇamatthi. Svāssāti dhūmachārikādīnaṃ abhāvena so assa aggi accimā ca vaṇṇimā ca pabhassaro cāti. Tathūpamāhaṃ māṇavāti tappaṭibhāgaṃ ahaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yatheva hi tiṇakaṭṭhupādānaṃ paṭicca jalamāno aggi dhūmachārikaṅgārānaṃ atthitāya sadoso hoti , evamevaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppannā pīti jātijarābyādhimaraṇasokādīnaṃ atthitāya sadosā. Yathā pana pariccattatiṇakaṭṭhupādāno dhūmādīnaṃ abhāvena parisuddho, evamevaṃ lokuttarajjhānadvayasampayuttā pīti jātiādīnaṃ abhāvena parisuddhāti attho.
469 现在,婆罗门以“布施为首”所安立的这五法,因为只有五法,所以不能稳定地成立,一旦加上“有慈悯心者”就变成六法。因此,为了指出这个过失,才说了“年轻人,那些……”等话。其中,“有慈悯心者”是指以慈悯为本性。巴利
469. Idāni ye te brāhmaṇehi cāgasīsena pañca dhammā paññattā, tepi yasmā pañceva hutvā na niccalā tiṭṭhanti, anukampājātikena saddhiṃ cha āpajjanti. Tasmā taṃ dosaṃ dassetuṃ ye te māṇavātiādimāha. Tattha anukampājātikanti anukampāsabhāvaṃ.
世尊之所以问“你在哪里见得最多”,是因为他说过:“这五法,出家者根本不可能圆满,在家人才能圆满。”因此,他这样发问,就是为了让对方亲口说出“只有出家者才能圆满这五法,在家人根本不可能圆满”。巴利
Kattha bahulaṃ samanupassasīti idaṃ bhagavā yasmā – ‘‘esa ime pañca dhamme pabbajito paripūretuṃ samattho nāma natthi, gahaṭṭho paripūretī’’ti āha, tasmā – ‘‘pabbajitova ime pūreti, gahaṭṭho pūretuṃ samattho nāma natthī’’ti teneva mukhena bhaṇāpetuṃ pucchati.
在“不恒常、不持续地说真实语”等说法中,在家人在没有其他办法时,确实也会说那种权宜的妄语;而出家人即使头被刀砍,也不会说那两种话。在家人连在三个月雨安居内都守不住学处,出家人则始终是苦行者、具戒者、依止苦行的人。在家人连一个月里八天都做不了伍波萨他甘马,出家人则一辈子都是梵行者。在家人只是把《宝经》《吉祥经》之类抄写在书本上放着,出家人则天天背诵。在家人连一餐饭都没法毫无缺漏地布施出去,出家人如果没有别的食物,也会布施给乌鸦、狗等,甚至把食物投进取物沙弥的钵中。应当这样理解其义。这五法,我说是慈心的眷属。巴利
Na satataṃ samitaṃ saccavādītiādīsu gahaṭṭho aññasmiṃ asati vaḷañjanakamusāvādampi karotiyeva, pabbajitā asinā sīse chijjantepi dve kathā na kathenti. Gahaṭṭho ca antotemāsamattampi sikkhāpadaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkoti, pabbajito niccameva tapassī sīlavā tapanissitako hoti. Gahaṭṭho māsassa aṭṭhadivasamattampi uposathakammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, pabbajitā yāvajīvaṃ brahmacārino honti. Gahaṭṭho ratanasuttamaṅgalasuttamattampi potthake likhitvā ṭhapeti, pabbajitā niccaṃ sajjhāyanti. Gahaṭṭho salākabhattampi akhaṇḍaṃ katvā dātuṃ na sakkoti, pabbajitā aññasmiṃ asati kākasunakhādīnampi piṇḍaṃ denti, bhaṇḍaggāhakadaharassapi patte pakkhipantevāti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Cittassāhametenti ahaṃ ete pañca dhamme mettacittassa parivāre vadāmīti attho.
470 “生而增”是指既在那里出生,也在那里长大。如果一个人只是在那里出生,却在别处长养,那么他对周围的村庄道路就不能完全了知,所以经中说“生而增”。不过,即使是“生而增”的人,如果离家已久,也不能完全了知,因此经中又说“刚刚离家”,意思是才刚离开不久。“迟缓”是指因为生起“这到底是路,还是不是路”的疑惑而拖延耽搁。“呆滞”是指就像有人突然被问到微细的义理时,身体变得僵硬一样,那种僵住的状态。“或不然”这句话,是在显示一切知智没有障碍。因为对那个人来说,由于魔罗的扰乱等原因,智慧可能会受到阻碍,因此他可能迟缓或呆滞;但一切知智没有障碍,没有任何东西能对它造成阻碍,这就是这句话所要说明的。巴利
470.Jātavaddhoti jāto ca vaḍḍhito ca. Yo hi kevalaṃ tattha jātova hoti, aññattha vaḍḍhito, tassa samantā gāmamaggā na sabbaso paccakkhā honti, tasmā jātavaddhoti āha. Jātavaddhopi hi yo ciraṃ nikkhanto, tassa na sabbaso paccakkhā honti, tasmā tāvadeva avasaṭanti āha, taṃkhaṇameva nikkhantanti attho. Dandhāyitattanti ‘‘ayaṃ nu kho maggo ayaṃ na nu kho’’ti kaṅkhāvasena cirāyitattaṃ. Vitthāyitattanti yathā sukhumaṃ atthajātaṃ sahasā pucchitassa kassaci sarīraṃ thaddhabhāvaṃ gaṇhāti, evaṃ thaddhabhāvagahaṇaṃ. Natvevāti iminā sabbaññutaññāṇassa appaṭihatabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tassa hi purisassa mārāvaṭṭanādīnaṃ vasena siyā ñāṇassa paṭighāto, tena so dandhāyeyya vā vitthāyeyya vā, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana appaṭihataṃ, na sakkā tassa kenaci antarāyo kātunti dīpeti.
正如,年轻人,一个力气大的人吹螺号。这里“力气大”是指体力充沛。“吹螺号”是指吹螺号的人。“毫不费力”是指不困难、不辛苦。因为一个虚弱的吹螺号的人,就算在吹螺号,也没办法让四个方向都听到声音,他的螺号声不能完全传遍各处。但力气大的人吹起来,声音就能广泛传播,所以世尊说“力气大”。关于“慈心解脱”:这里如果只说“慈”,那么近行定和安止定都可以算;但如果说了“心解脱”,那就只指安止定。所谓“有量的业”,是指欲界业;“无量之业”指色界与无色界业。在这两者之中,这里特指梵住业。因为它超越了量,以限定和不限定的方式遍满各方而修成,所以称为“无量之业”。“它不会在那里残留,不会在那里停留”:那欲界业在那色界与无色界业中不停留、不滞留。这是什么意思?欲界业不能在那色界与无色界业中间卡住或停留,也不能遍满、穷尽色界与无色界业而占据自己的位置并安住。相反,正是色界与无色界业像大洪水遍满、穷尽小水一样,占据自己的位置而安住,排斥欲界业的果报,自己就导向与梵天共住。其余各处都容易理解。巴利
Seyyathāpi māṇava balavā saṅkhadhamoti ettha balavāti balasampanno. Saṅkhadhamoti saṅkhadhamako. Appakasirenāti akicchena adukkhena. Dubbalo hi saṅkhadhamako saṅkhaṃ dhamantopi na sakkoti catasso disā sarena viññāpetuṃ, nāssa saṅkhasaddo sabbaso phari. Balavato pana vipphāriko hoti, tasmā balavāti āha. Mettāya cetovimuttiyāti ettha mettāyāti vutte upacāropi appanāpi vaṭṭati, cetovimuttiyāti vutte pana appanāva vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pamāṇakataṃ kammanti pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ nāma kāmāvacaraṃ vuccati, appamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ nāma rūpārūpāvacaraṃ. Tesupi idha brahmavihārakammaññeva adhippetaṃ. Tañhi pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā odhisakaanodhisaka disāpharaṇavasena vaḍḍhetvā katattā appamāṇakatanti vuccati. Na taṃ tatrāvasissati, na taṃ tatrāvatiṭṭhatīti taṃ kāmāvacarakammaṃ tasmiṃ rūpārūpāvacarakamme na ohīyati na tiṭṭhati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Kāmāvacarakammaṃ tassa rūpārūpāvacarakammassa antarā laggituṃ vā ṭhātuṃ vā rūpārūpāvacarakammaṃ pharitvā pariyādiyitvā attano okāsaṃ gahetvā patiṭṭhātuṃ vā na sakkoti, atha kho rūpārūpāvacarakammameva kāmāvacaraṃ mahogho viya parittaudakaṃ pharitvā pariyādiyitvā attano okāsaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati, tassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā sayameva brahmasahabyataṃ upanetīti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
10.《桑嘎拉瓦经》注释巴利
10. Saṅgāravasuttavaṇṇanā
473 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《桑嘎拉瓦经》。其中,“禅佳利咖巴”是一个叫这个名字的村子。“净信”是指由不坏净信而生的净信。据说她是一位入流者圣弟子,是跋拉瓦迦种姓婆罗门的妻子。那位婆罗门以前时常邀请婆罗门们,恭敬供养他们。可是,他把这位婆罗门女娶回家后,因为无法让这位美貌又出身高贵的婆罗门女动怒,便没办法再供养婆罗门们。于是,婆罗门们无论在哪儿见到他,都逼问说:“如今你已不是信奉婆罗门的人了,竟连一天对婆罗门们的恭敬供养都不做了。”他回到家,把这件事告诉婆罗门女,说道:“女士,如果您能有一天管住嘴,我就布施一天饮食给婆罗门们。”她说:“你的应施之物,你爱在哪儿布施就在哪儿布施,这跟我有什么关系?”于是他邀请了婆罗门们,让人煮了浓稠的乳粥,又让人把屋子打扫干净,铺设好座位,请婆罗门们坐下。婆罗门女穿上大外衣,手持勺子,在分送食物时被衣角绊倒,连“我在给婆罗门们分送食物”这样的念头都没有,由于习惯的力量,突然忆念起导师,便唱出了优陀那。巴利
473.Evaṃme sutanti saṅgāravasuttaṃ. Tattha cañcalikappeti evaṃnāmake gāme. Abhippasannāti aveccappasādavasena pasannā. Sā kira sotāpannā ariyasāvikā bhāradvājagottassa brāhmaṇassa bhariyā. So brāhmaṇo pubbe kālena kālaṃ brāhmaṇe nimantetvā tesaṃ sakkāraṃ karoti. Imaṃ pana brāhmaṇiṃ gharaṃ ānetvā abhirūpāya mahākulāya brāhmaṇiyā cittaṃ kopetuṃ asakkonto brāhmaṇānaṃ sakkāraṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi. Atha naṃ brāhmaṇā diṭṭhadiṭṭhaṭṭhāne – ‘‘nayidāni tvaṃ brāhmaṇaladdhiko, ekāhampi brāhmaṇānaṃ sakkāraṃ na karosī’’ti nippīḷenti. So gharaṃ āgantvā brāhmaṇiyā tamatthaṃ ārocetvā – ‘‘sace, bhoti ekadivasaṃ mukhaṃ rakkhituṃ sakkuṇeyyāsi, brāhmaṇānaṃ ekadivasaṃ bhikkhaṃ dadeyya’’nti āha. Tuyhaṃ deyyadhammaṃ ruccanakaṭṭhāne dehi, kiṃ mayhaṃ etthāti. So brāhmaṇe nimantetvā appodakaṃ pāyāsaṃ pacāpetvā gharañca sujjhāpetvā āsanāni paññāpetvā brāhmaṇe nisīdāpesi. Brāhmaṇī mahāsāṭakaṃ nivāsetvā kaṭacchuṃ gahetvā parivisantī dussakaṇṇake pakkhalitvā ‘‘brāhmaṇe parivisāmī’’ti saññampi akatvā āsevanavasena sahasā satthārameva anussaritvā udānaṃ udānesi.
婆罗门们听到那番感叹后,愤怒地说:“这个两边讨好的家伙是沙门乔达摩的朋友,我们不要接受他的施物!”于是扔下食物就走了。那位婆罗门说:“我不是一开始就对你说过‘今天你要管住嘴’吗?你白白糟蹋了这么多牛奶和米之类的东西!”他极度愤怒,说道:“这个贱女人,不管在什么地方都称赞那个剃头沙门的德行,现在,贱女人啊,我就要去驳倒他那位导师的言论。”于是婆罗门女说:“你去吧,婆罗门,去了你就会知道。”接着她又说:“婆罗门,在包括天神的世界里……我都不见有谁能驳倒世尊的言论。”他便前往世尊那里。巴利
Brāhmaṇā udānaṃ sutvā ‘‘ubhatopakkhiko esa samaṇassa gotamassa sahāyo, nāssa deyyadhammaṃ gaṇhissāmā’’ti kupitā bhojanāni chaḍḍetvā nikkhamiṃsu. Brāhmaṇo – ‘‘nanu paṭhamaṃyeva taṃ avacaṃ ‘ajjekadivasaṃ mukhaṃ rakkheyyāsī’ti, ettakaṃ te khīrañca taṇḍulādīni ca nāsitānī’’ti ativiya kopavasaṃ upagato – ‘‘evameva panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, idāni tyāhaṃ vasali tassa satthuno vādaṃ āropessāmī’’ti āha. Atha naṃ brāhmaṇī ‘‘gaccha tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, gantvā vijānissasī’’ti vatvā ‘‘na khvāhaṃ taṃ, brāhmaṇa, passāmi sadevake loke…pe… vādaṃ āropeyyā’’tiādimāha. So satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā –
“ 砍掉什么才能睡得安乐?砍掉什么才不会忧愁?
乔达摩,你称赞杀灭哪一种法?”巴利
‘‘Kiṃsu chetvā sukhaṃ seti, kiṃsu chetvā na socati; Kissassu ekadhammassa, vadhaṃ rocesi gotamā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.187) –
他提出了这个问题。导师说:巴利
Pañhaṃ pucchi. Satthā āha –
“ 把愤怒砍断后,就能安乐地入睡;把愤怒砍断后,就不再忧愁。
婆罗门啊,嗔怒的根是有毒的,它的顶端却是甜的;
圣者们称赞对嗔恨的断除,因为断除它之后就不会再忧愁。”巴利
‘‘Kodhaṃ chetvā sukhaṃ seti, kodhaṃ chetvā na socati; Kodhassa visamūlassa, madhuraggassa brāhmaṇa; Vadhaṃ ariyā pasaṃsanti, tañhi chetvā na socatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.187) –
他解答了那个问题。那人出家后,证得了阿拉汉果。他的弟弟名叫骂詈跋拉瓦迦,听说“我哥哥出家了”,就来到世尊面前辱骂世尊,被世尊调伏后出家,证得了阿拉汉果。他的另一个弟弟名叫孙德利格跋勒德瓦哲,也来见世尊,问了问题,听完解答后出家,证得了阿拉汉果。他还有一个弟弟名叫宾伽罗跋拉瓦迦,他问完问题,在问题解答结束时出家,证得了阿拉汉果。桑嘎拉瓦童子是他们当中最小的弟弟,那天和婆罗门们一起坐在同一个食堂里。“凋落”就是衰败、变成不吉利。“毁灭”就是已经走向灭亡。“在存在的事物中”就是在存在的事物当中。“戒与智”就是对戒和智都不知道。巴利
Pañhaṃ kathesi. So pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Tasseva kaniṭṭhabhātā akkosakabhāradvājo nāma ‘‘bhātā me pabbajito’’ti sutvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā akkositvā bhagavatā vinīto pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Aparo tassa kaniṭṭho sundarikabhāradvājo nāma. Sopi bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchitvā vissajjanaṃ sutvā pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Aparo tassa kaniṭṭho piṅgalabhāradvājo nāma. So pañhaṃ pucchitvā pañhabyākaraṇapariyosāne pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Saṅgāravomāṇavoti ayaṃ tesaṃ sabbakaniṭṭho tasmiṃ divase brāhmaṇehi saddhiṃ ekabhattagge nisinno. Avabhūtāvāti avaḍḍhibhūtā avamaṅgalabhūtāyeva. Parabhūtāvāti vināsaṃ pattāyeva. Vijjamānānanti vijjamānesu. Sīlapaññāṇanti sīlañca ñāṇañca na jānāsi.
474 在现法中自证,达到究竟彼岸的意思是:在现法中、在当下这个生命体里,自己证知,成为到达终点的人,证得了被称为彼岸、作为一切法之彼岸的涅槃,然后说“我们已证得”,从而宣称自己是初始梵行者。“初始梵行”是说:宣称“我们是梵行的开端、生起者、产生者”——就是这样宣称。“推理者”就是执取推理的人。“思察者”就是探究者,也就是运用智慧之后这样主张的人。“我是他们中的一员”是说:我是那些正自觉者当中的一位。巴利
474.Diṭṭhadhammābhiññāvosānapāramippattāti diṭṭhadhamme abhiññāte imasmiññeva attabhāve abhijānitvā vositavosānā hutvā pāramīsaṅkhātaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ pārabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ pattā mayanti vatvā ādibrahmacariyaṃ paṭijānantīti attho. Ādibrahmacariyanti brahmacariyassa ādibhūtā uppādakā janakāti evaṃ paṭijānantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Takkīti takkagāhī. Vīmaṃsīti vīmaṃsako, paññācāraṃ carāpetvā evaṃvādī. Tesāhamasmīti tesaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ ahamasmi aññataro.
485 “不坚定的苦行”是指不稳固的苦行,它和“精勤”这个词连在一起理解,也同样和“善士”这个词连在一起。这里要表达的是:乔达摩尊者有不坚定的精勤苦行,有善士的精勤苦行。被问到“有天神吗”的时候,这个青年心想“正自觉者好像不知道就说了出来”,所以才那样说。“既然如此”是指在你们不知道的情况下。“虚妄、说谎”是说你们的话没有结果、毫无意义。这样,青年就是在用妄语指责世尊。“有智慧的人”是指聪明的男子。这是阐明“但你由于无智,连我所作的解答都不知道”。“高度认可”是指以“高”这个词在世间一致认可、众所周知。“增上天”是指即使是小孩子也被叫作天,也被叫作天后,而诸天神则被称为增上天,意思是比世间那些获得“天”“天后”名称的人更为超胜。其余各处含义显明。巴利
485.Aṭṭhitavatanti aṭṭhitatapaṃ, assa padhānapadena saddhiṃ sambandho, tathā sappurisapadassa. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – bhoto gotamassa aṭṭhitapadhānavataṃ ahosi, sappurisapadhānavataṃ ahosīti. Atthidevātipuṭṭho samānoti idaṃ māṇavo ‘‘sammāsambuddho ajānantova pakāsesī’’ti saññāya āha. Evaṃ santeti tumhākaṃ ajānanabhāve sante. Tucchaṃ musā hotīti tumhākaṃ kathā aphalā nipphalā hoti. Evaṃ māṇavo bhagavantaṃ musāvādena niggaṇhāti nāma. Viññunā purisenāti paṇḍitena manussena. Tvaṃ pana aviññutāya mayā byākatampi na jānāsīti dīpeti. Uccena sammatanti uccena saddena sammataṃ pākaṭaṃ lokasmiṃ. Adhidevāti susudārakāpi hi devā nāma honti, deviyo nāma honti devā pana adhidevā nāma, loke devo devīti laddhanāmehi manussehi adhikāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.